JP6836273B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention executes a variable display game based on the winning of a game ball to the starting winning opening, and when a special result is derived in the variable display game, a special gaming state capable of imparting a game value to the player is generated. Regarding the game machine to play.

Conventionally, a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed based on the establishment of a start condition is executed, and when the result of the variable display game is a winning result, a special game state capable of giving a game value to the player is generated. It is a possible gaming machine, and the first variation display game is executed based on the establishment of the first start condition, and the second variation display game is executed based on the establishment of the second start condition, and the first variation is executed. It is possible to set both the display game and the second variable display game in the running state, and when one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game results in a winning result, the other. There is known a gaming machine that interrupts the variable display of the variable display game of the game or forcibly stops the variable display of the other variable display game as a result of the deviation (see Patent Document 1).
..

JP-A-2017-006262

In the conventional game machine, the player may not be able to recognize whether the first variable display game or the second variable display game is being executed.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of easily recognizing which of a first variable display game and a second variable display game is being executed as a main variable display game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a game machine that executes a variable display game based on the winning of a game ball to the start winning opening and generates a special game state in which a player can be given a game value when a special result is derived in the variable display game. ,
As the starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening arranged on the right side with respect to the first starting winning opening are provided.
The first variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, and the second variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. Variable display game execution control means for executing variable display games,
With speakers
A sound output control means for controlling the speaker and
A notification control means for controlling a notification unit composed of a light emitting member is provided.
The notification unit includes a first notification unit corresponding to both the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game, a second notification unit corresponding to the first fluctuation display game, and the second notification unit. A third notification unit, which is arranged on the right side of the game and corresponds to the second variation display game, is included.
As game modes, a first game mode in which the first variable display game is mainly executed as a variable display game, a second game mode in which the second variable display game is mainly executed as a variable display game, and Is provided,
The sound output control means has different sound output modes of the speaker depending on whether the first variable display game is executed as the main variable display game or the second variable display game is executed.
The notification control means
The light emitting mode of the first notification unit is different depending on whether the first variable display game is executed or the second variable display game is executed as the main variable display game .
By blinking either the second notification unit or the third notification unit, it is possible to notify which of the first variation display game and the second variation display game is being executed. To do.

According to the present invention, it is possible to easily recognize which of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is executed as the main variable display game.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the 1st special variation winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the structure of a batch display device. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in a special game state. It is a figure explaining the transition of a game state. It is a figure explaining the kind of a variation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of a variation pattern. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining the initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the V abnormal passage monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the residual ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the discharge ball monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining the effect command setting process. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating an abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. Special FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a change in the number of abnormal fluctuations. Special FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example in which anomalous fluctuation notification is performed. It is a flowchart explaining the game machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 1 switch processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure start port 2 switch processing. Special Figure 1 is a flowchart illustrating game processing. Special Figure 2 is a flowchart illustrating game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. Special Figure 1 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special Figure 2 It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating an information setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating the information setting process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining the distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability fluctuation number update process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in a fanfare / interval process. Special FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hit fanfare. Special FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 while opening a big prize opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 while opening a big prize opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the process in small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit. It is a flowchart explaining the small hit residual sphere processing. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a small hit end process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a small hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port 1 signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol fixed number signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the probability change operation area switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the lever solenoid control processing. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display device. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display device. It is a figure explaining the operation mode in the special game state in the 1st modification of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation of Special FIG. 1 in the second embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation of Special FIG. 1 in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation of FIG. 2 in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating processing during fluctuation of FIG. 2 in the second embodiment. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a special drawing 1 small hit end process in the second embodiment. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a special figure 2 small hit end process in the second embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the fluctuation time of the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific game state is short. It is a figure which shows an example of the case where the fluctuation time of the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific game state is long. It is a front view of the game board in the 1st modification and the 2nd modification of the 2nd embodiment. It is a figure explaining the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the 1st modification of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the 2nd modification of 2nd Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
As shown in FIG. 1, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (
It is assembled to the support frame) 11 so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) has a front frame 1
It is stored in a storage unit (not shown) formed on the front side of 2. In addition, the front frame (main body frame) 1
In 2, a glass frame 15 (with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30)
A transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

In addition, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built into the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, and decorations, effects, and notifications when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are displayed in an abnormality notification color (for example, red). A frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) with (), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. It should be noted that a lamp for notifying the payout abnormality may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (which supplies a game ball to a hitting ball launching device (not shown))
(Reservoir), the upper plate ball outlet 22 from which the game balls paid out from the payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and the upper plate 21 paid out with the upper plate 21 full. A lower plate (receiver) 23 for storing, an operation unit 24 of a ball launching device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
On the upper edge, a production button switch 25a for receiving a push operation input from a player
Is provided with a built-in effect button 25. Further, a touch panel 29 for receiving a contact operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25.
Further, on the lower right side of the lower part of the front frame 12, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25. A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

Further, on the right side of the effect button 25, there is a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and an ejection button that is operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. Balance display section that displays the balance of the prepaid card (not shown)
Etc. are provided. In the game machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game board 30.
Fire toward the front game area 32. In addition, by operating the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is a resin side case 3 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30.
It is configured to be surrounded by 3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. Display 41
Is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Further, the left portion and the right portion of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating.
The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are three general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 11).
Detected by.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first start winning opening 36 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 11). Further, in the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a second start winning opening 37 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure 2 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening 37 is the starting opening 2 switch 37a (FIG. 11).
See).

Below the center case 40 in the game area 32, on the right side of the first start winning opening 36, there is a first special that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A variable winning device (upper prize opening) 38 is provided.

The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c in which the upper end side rotates in a direction of tilting toward the front side and can be opened, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how the upper prize opening is closed (closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to open state (favorable state for the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 11) as a driving device, and is provided with a big hit or a small hit. During the special game state based on the above, by converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is given. Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), the upper prize opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 11) is arranged as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper prize opening. There is.

FIG. 3 shows the flow path of the game ball in the first special variable winning device 38. Inside the first special variable winning device 38 (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a is provided as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first special variable winning device 38. ing. All the game balls that have entered the first special variable winning device 38 are detected through the upper large winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper flow path 38j.

The upper flow path 38j is provided with a probabilistic operating region 38h through which the game ball can flow, and a lever solenoid 38f (see FIG. 11) is used to change the inflow probability of the game ball into the probabilistic operating region 38h. An operating lever member 38i is provided. The lever member is a plate-shaped member that can slide in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIG. 4, it protrudes forward to cover the probabilistic operation area 38h, and the game ball cannot flow into the probabilistic operation area 38h. As a result, it is possible to convert the game ball into an open state in which the game ball can flow into the probability variation operation region 38h. That is, the probability variation operation region 38h can be converted into a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize and an open state in which the game ball can win a prize, and forms a specific region in which the game ball can flow into the lever member 38i. However, it forms an inflow control member that can be converted into a state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific area (probability variation operation area 38h) and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific area (probability variation operation area 38h).

The probability variation operation region 38h is provided with a probability variation operation region switch 38d that can detect the inflow of the game ball, and the game ball that has flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h is detected by the probability variation operation region switch 38d and then the lower flow path 38k. Inflow to. Based on the fact that the game ball is detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d, the probability state of the special figure variation display game is set to the high probability state after the end of the special game state.

Further, a passage port switch 38g capable of detecting the passage of the game ball is provided on the downstream side to the left of the probability variation operation region 38h in the upper flow path 38j, and the game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h is provided. After being detected by the passage switch 38g, it flows into the lower flow path 38k. The lower flow path 38k is adapted so that the flow path through which the game ball passing through the probability variation operation region 38h flows down and the flow path through which the game ball passing through the passage port switch 38g flows down are merged on the downstream side. And
A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the passage of game balls is provided at the downstream end of the lower flow path 38k, and after all the game balls flowing into the lower flow path 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, It flows into the discharge flow path that discharges the game ball to the outside of the game machine.

In the first special variable winning device 38 configured in this way, the number of game balls detected by the upper prize opening switch 38a matches the number of game balls detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d and the passing port switch 38g. By doing so, it can be confirmed that all the game balls that have flowed into the upper flow path 38j have been discharged. Further, when the number of game balls detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d and the passage port switch 38g matches the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the game balls that have flowed into the lower flow path 38k It can be confirmed that it has been discharged. Further, when the number of inflowing game balls detected by the upper prize opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e match, the game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 It can be confirmed that all have been discharged.

Returning to FIG. 2, directly below the first start winning opening 36, there is a second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39 is arranged. The second special variable winning device 39 is provided with an opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in.

The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the lower prize opening is changed from a closed state (a closed state that is disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 39c driven by a lower winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 11) as a driving device, and is provided with a big hit or a small hit. During the special game state based on the above, the lower prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize opening, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). ) Is given.

Inside the lower prize opening (winning area), a lower prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 11) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. .. Further, below the second special variable winning device 39, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

The arrangement of the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. 2, the second special variable winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variable winning device 38. In this case, it may be completely overlapped vertically, or it may be shifted to the left and right so that only a part of it overlaps vertically. In addition, the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and the large winning opening can be opened by sliding a plate-shaped member capable of closing the large winning opening. It may be in the form of.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), so that the player can aim for a prize in the first start winning opening 36 and launches the game ball to the right game area. By (so-called right-handed), it is possible to aim for a prize in the second start winning opening 37 or the first special variable winning device 38. The second special variable winning device 39 can be aimed at by firing a game ball in either the left or right game area.

Here, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is arranged at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is launched into the right game area. The game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. Since the material at least on the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows the game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside, the player or the like can see the flow path. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be visually recognized through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. ..

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, which form the special figure variable display game, and various information are displayed collectively. A display device 50 is provided.

As shown in FIG. 4, the batch display device 50 is a special figure 1 display (first special figure variation display unit) for a special figure 1 variable display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1)
) And special figure 2 variable display game special figure 2 display (second special figure variable display unit) 52 (D2),
Special figure 1 composed of LED lamps Memory display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the variable display game (
D11 to D14) are provided.

In addition, the batch display device 50 has round display units 60 (D3 to D7) that display the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and closed).
Left-handed (normal) or right-handed, which is more advantageous to the player (corresponding to the playing state)
1st game state display unit 77 (D8 to D10) for notifying, the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game (
A probability display unit 78 (D15 to D18) for notifying a high probability state or a low probability state) is provided. The batch display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and a display that lights up when a jackpot occurs to notify the occurrence of the jackpot. A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Further, a normal game is executed like a conventional game machine, and a second start winning opening is formed in which a game ball can be won based on a specific result of the game. When equipped with a variable winning device
The normal map display unit that displays the normal map fluctuation display game, the memory display unit for notifying the start memory number of the normal map fluctuation display game, the time saving state notification unit that lights up when a time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state, etc. It may be provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to, for example, 100 msec. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 4 (b), it is provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment display in addition to the central segment. The eighth segment is also blinking and driven to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished from each other. Then, when the result of the game is "off", for example, the central segment (in the case of special figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side in addition) is turned on as the result mode of the off, and the result of the game is "
In the case of "hit", the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the out-of-order result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) is turned on and the game result is displayed.

The storage display unit 54 determines the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, in FIG. 4 (c). ) Shows in multiple Ls
Displayed by turning off and turning on (blinking) the ED. The round display unit 60 is composed of an LED lamp or the like, and as shown in FIG. 4D, all the LEDs are turned off when not in the special game state, and are selected according to the special result during the special game state. The LED is turned on according to the number of rounds. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

As shown in FIG. 4E, for example, the first game state display unit 77 turns off all the LEDs when the left-handed hit is more advantageous to the player than the right-handed hit (during normal hit). In the case where right-handed is more advantageous for the player than left-handed (when right-handed), all LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 4E, the probability display unit 78 turns off all the LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability change). In the case of (state), all the LEDs are turned on.

FIG. 5 shows the probabilities of big hits and small hits, the distribution probability of the big hit type when the big hit is won, and the distribution probability of the small hit type when the small hit is won. The big hit is a special result (first special result) with the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) without the operation of the condition device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs (stop display of the big hit symbol) in the special figure fluctuation display game, and when the condition device operates, for example, a big hit state occurs and it is the first as a special electric accessory. 1 It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set (the accessory continuous operating device is activated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case where the small hit lottery is won, for example. The "conditional device" may be a software means such as a flag that is turned on / off by software as described above, or a hardware means such as a switch that is turned on / off electrically. Further, "conditional device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of an electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

The jackpot probability, which is the probability of a jackpot (first special result), is common to Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.
The probabilities in the normal gaming state, which is a low probability state, and the specific gaming state, which is a high probability state, are shown in FIG. 5, respectively.
The probability is as shown in (a). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, in the special gaming state based on the big hit (first special gaming state), the probability variation operating region 38h of the first special variable winning device 38
When the game ball flows into the game and is detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d (passing V), the probability state becomes high after the end of the special game state, and the special figure variation display game of a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) is played. It is configured to be in a low probability state when executed. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 5 (b). This small hit probability is higher in Special Figure 2 than in Special Figure 1. In addition, the small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the big hit and small hit lottery, the big hit and the small hit are not won in duplicate. Therefore, in the high probability state, the special figure 2 will always win either a big hit or a small hit. In addition, it may be possible that the result may be off.

Further, FIG. 5C shows the jackpot types and distribution probabilities that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, and FIG.
(D) shows the small hit types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the special variable winning device that is opened for each small hit type, the opening time, the number of opening times, and the distribution probability. As shown in FIG. 5C, there are three types of special results in the special figure 1 variable display game: 12R probability variation, 5R probability variation, and 12R normal, and the special result in the special figure 2 variation display game. There are two types, 12R probability variation and 2R probability variation. The types of these special results are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers. The number of each jackpot type indicates the number of rounds, and the probability change indicates that the game ball is likely to flow into the probability change operation area 38h and tends to be in a high probability state (probability change state) after the end of the special game state. , There is a low possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operation area 38h, and a high probability state after the end of the special game state (
It shows that it is unlikely to be in a probable state). It should be noted that a special result may be provided in which the possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operation region 38h is lower than that of the probability variation hit, but the possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operation region 38h is higher than that of the normal hit.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the game ball will be in the high probability state depending on whether or not the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h. Therefore, even if the jackpot type is the probability variation, the probability variation operation region 3
If the game ball does not flow into the 8h, the high probability state does not occur, and even if the jackpot type is normal, if the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h, the high probability state occurs. Regarding the 2R probability variation of Special Figure 2, although the number of balls released is not so large, there is a high possibility that the game ball will flow into the probability variation operation region 38h, and the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state will be repeated. It is set to 100 times. In the special game state based on this 2R probability variation, the effect is performed so that the number of games that can be executed in the high probability state is added. Further, in the special gaming state based on the small hit (second special gaming state), the probability state is not changed depending on the presence or absence of inflow to the probability variation operation region 38h, and the probability state when the small hit occurs is maintained. ..

FIG. 6 shows an opening mode in each round for each jackpot type. The details of the opening mode are shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 6A, in the 12R probability variation, the first round is the first.
The special variable winning device 38 is opened and V is opened. The upper V opening is an opening mode in which the game ball is likely to flow into the probability variation operating region 38h. Then, from the second round onward, the lower long opening that opens the second special variable winning device 39 is performed. As shown in FIG. 6B, the 5R probability variation is also 1
In the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the upper V is opened, and in the second and subsequent rounds, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened and the lower long opening is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 6 (c), in the 2R probability variation, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the first round and the V is opened, and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened in the second round. Open the lower long.

As shown in FIG. 6C, in the normal case of 12R, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened and the short opening is performed in the first round. The upper short opening is an opening mode in which the possibility that the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h is lower than that of the upper V opening. Then, from the second round onward, the lower long opening that opens the second special variable winning device 39 is performed. It should be noted that the game ball can flow into the probability variation operation region 38h only in the upper V opening and the upper short opening performed in the first round. That is, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the specific round, which is the round in which the game ball may flow into the probability variation operation region 38h forming the specific region, is the first round.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the lower long opening, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened with the start of the round (t11), and the openable time of 25,000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) is opened. When either condition of winning the game ball is satisfied, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed to end the round (t12). After that, the lower prize opening remaining ball processing time starts (t12), and when the lower prize opening remaining ball processing time ends, the interval time starts (t1).
3) When the interval time ends, the next round starts (t14). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

As shown in FIG. 7B, in the upper V opening, the first special variable winning device 3 is accompanied by the start of the round.
8 is released (t31). Furthermore, the lever solenoid 38f is turned on at the start of the round.
The state is set and the probability change operation area switch 38d is enabled. Lever solenoid 38
When f is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the probabilistic operating region 38h and the game ball cannot flow in. When the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i retracts from the probabilistic operating region 38h and the game ball. Is ready to flow in. Further, the state in which the probability variation operation area switch 38d is effective is a state in which the detection of the game ball by the probability variation operation area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if the probability variation operation area switch 38d detects a game ball, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is turned off 64 ms after the start of the round (t32). Then, 100 ms after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off, the probability variation operation area switch 38d becomes invalid (t33). That is, the game ball that has won a prize immediately after the first special variable winning device 38 is opened may flow into the probability variation operating region 38h.

200 ms after the start of the round, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t).
34). Then, after 2700 ms, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (
When either the openable time of 25,000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round ends (t35). t39). After that, the interval time and the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening are started (t39), and when the processing time of the remaining balls of the upper winning opening is completed, the interval time is started (t).
41) When the interval time ends, the next round starts (t42).

Further, after the second opening (t35) of the first special variable winning device 38, the lever solenoid 3
8f is also turned on for a predetermined time (t36 to t37, t38 to t39). Further, the probability variation operation area switch 38d is also effective (t36). 2 of this first special variable winning device 38
Since the second opening is for a sufficiently long time and the lever solenoid 38f remains ON for a long time, the game ball will almost certainly flow into the probability variation operating region 38h.
Therefore, when the jackpot type is probabilistic, it will almost certainly be in a high probability state.

Further, the lever solenoid 38f can be turned on for a predetermined time even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed (t40 to t43), and flows into the first special variable winning device 38 just before closing. It is possible for the game ball to flow into the probabilistic operating region 38h. The first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are processed as the remaining balls in the upper prize opening. If all of them are discharged within the time, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated at the end of the remaining ball processing time (t42), and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalidated.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and all the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged within the remaining ball processing time. If the lever solenoid 38f is not completely discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is turned on (t43), the lever solenoid 38f is discharged when the discharge is completed.
Is turned off to end the operation, and the probability change operation area switch 38d becomes invalid.

In addition, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed due to the passage of the openable time or a predetermined number of game balls are won, and the game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 have the remaining ball processing time of the upper prize opening. If all of the lever solenoid 38f is not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43), the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t43) is completed. The lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the operation is terminated. In this case, the probability variation operation area switch 38d becomes invalid 100 ms after the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t43) (t44).
..

As shown in FIG. 7C, in the upper short opening, the same opening as the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the upper V opening is performed (t51 to t54), and the opening is completed. End the round (t54). The opening of the first special variable winning device 38 is for a very short time, and the ON state of the lever solenoid 38f is also for a short time.
It is unlikely that the game ball will flow into the probabilistic operating region 38h. Therefore, it is rare that a high probability state occurs when the jackpot type is normal.

The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the activation / invalidation of the probability variation operation area switch are performed in the same manner as in the case of opening the upper V as long as the game ball remains in the first special variation winning device 38 (t55). ~ T63). Therefore, if the game ball remains in the first special variable winning device 38 even after the processing time of the remaining ball in the upper prize opening has elapsed, the lever solenoid 38f is in the OFF state when the discharge of the remaining ball is completed. The operation is terminated, and the probability variation operation area switch 38d becomes invalid. If all the game balls are not discharged by the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62), the lever solenoid 38f is turned off at the end of the period in which the lever solenoid 38f is in the ON state (t62). After the state is reached and the operation is completed and the lever solenoid 38f is turned off (t62), 10
After 0 ms, the probabilistic working area switch 38d becomes invalid (t63).

In addition, the first opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 7 (b) (
In t31 to t34) and the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 (t51 to t54) in the upper short opening shown in FIG. 7 (c), at least one game ball is inserted in the first special variable winning device 38. The opening time should be such that a prize can be won (for example, 1.8 seconds or more).

FIG. 8 shows the transition of the gaming state. The gaming state includes a normal gaming state ST1, a first specific gaming state ST2, and a second specific gaming state ST3. In addition to this, there is a special game state, but it is omitted here. In each game state, the hit probability from which a special result to be controlled by the game control device 100 is derived, the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300 to determine the effect mode of the game, and the target should be mainly aimed at in the game state. The main starting area, which is the starting area, the main variable special map, which is the type of special figure variation display game to be executed, and the launch direction of the game ball are defined.

As described above, in the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first start winning opening 36 is left-handed.
It is possible to aim for a prize in the second start winning opening 37 by hitting right. That is, it is possible to select whether to execute the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game according to the player's intention. In addition, each game state is designed on the assumption that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly played, and the player plays the game according to this design. It is configured so that it is advantageous for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure variation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design so as to proceed. In the following description, one special figure variation display game determined to be the main in each game state may be referred to as a main variation, and the other special figure variation display game may be referred to as an irregular variation.

The normal game state ST1 is a state in which the hit probability is low and is not a time-saving state (no time-saving) in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game is shortened. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is a normal mode. Further, since the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. As will be described later, in this normal game state ST1, a very long fluctuation time is set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.
As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in terms of time, and the normal game state ST
The player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at the acquisition of the small hit in 1.

The first specific game state ST2 is a state in which the hit probability is high and the time is shortened (there is a time reduction) in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game is shortened. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode. Further, since the main fluctuation special figure is a special figure 2 variation display game, the main starting area is the second starting winning opening 37, and the firing direction is right-handed in order to aim at the second starting winning opening 37. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 2 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 1 variable display game is the irregular variation. This first specific game state ST2
Then, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is shortened compared to the case of the normal game state ST1, and the person who plays the special figure 2 variable display game by hitting right and aiming at the second start winning opening 37. Is advantageous for the player. Since there is only one of a big hit and a small hit in the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the probability that the small hit is won is higher than the big hit, the small hit occurs frequently in this first specific game state ST2. As a result, the number of balls held by the player increases. Since small hits occur frequently in this way, the effect mode is a mode called small hit RUSH.

The second specific game state ST3 is a state in which the hit probability is high and is not a time-saving state (no time-saving) in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game is shortened. The effect mode that defines the effect mode is the High mode. Further, since the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. That is, it is designed so that the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variation and the special figure 2 variable display game is the irregular variation. The execution mode such as the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game is the same as that of the normal game state ST1, except that the probability state is a high probability state.

In addition, the normal mode, the small hit RUSH mode, and H, which are the effect modes in each of the above-mentioned game states, are used.
Since the eight modes have different production modes, it is possible for the player to grasp which game state the player is in. In addition to making it possible to grasp the game state by the production mode
The launch direction of the game ball is notified, and the player can grasp the launch direction and the main fluctuation special map. In particular, in the High mode, the probability variation notification display that can clearly grasp that the player is in the high probability state may be performed so that the player does not stop the game.

Of these three gaming states, the normal gaming state ST1 is the most disadvantageous state for the player. Since the second specific game state ST3 is a high probability state, it is a state more advantageous to the player than the normal game state ST1, and since the first specific game state ST2 is a high probability state and a time saving state, the normal game state ST1 and the first 2 Specific game state This is a state more advantageous to the player than ST3.

The transition of the game state is performed by the end of the special game state based on the derivation of the special result or the digestion of the specified number of games. Basically, when a special result is derived to enter a special gaming state, and a game ball flows into the probabilistic operating region 38h of the first special variable winning device 38 in the special gaming state and is detected by the probabilistic operating region switch 38d. (With V passage) shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the special gaming state. In addition, when the special result is derived and the game is in the special game state, and the game ball does not flow into the probability variation operation region 38h of the first special variable winning device 38 in the special game state (no V passage), the special game state is reached. Normal game state ST1 after the end of
Will be. Further, in a high probability state such as the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3, when the specified number of games (here, 100 times) is executed after the end of the special game state, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. To do.

As an exception to the transition of the gaming state, in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3, a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game which is not the main variable special figure, and the special game state is set. The case where the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h of the first special variation winning device 38 and is detected by the probability variation operation region switch 38d (with V passing) can be mentioned.
In this case, after the end of the special gaming state, the transition to the second specific gaming state ST3 is performed instead of the first specific gaming state ST2. That is, when the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a special result, the game value given to the player differs depending on whether or not the special figure variation display game is the main special figure variation display game. It will be. Here, the game value of whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is set to the time saving state is different.

Here, regarding the special figure 2 variable display game, the game value given to the player differs depending on whether or not the special figure variable display game is the main special figure variable display game.
Similarly, with respect to the special figure 1 variable display game, the game value given to the player may be different depending on whether or not the special figure variable display game is the main special figure variable display game. In addition, the game value to be different is determined by the presence or absence of a time saving state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the number of rounds in the special gaming state and the opening mode of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 may be different. Further, the ease of inflow of the game ball into the probability variation operation region 38h may be different. In addition, the number of games to be shortened may be different. In addition to this, as a game value in the production, whether or not to execute a specific video or audio may be different. Further, these combinations may be used.

Further, in the special gaming state, an effect of notifying whether to shift to the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state may be performed. By performing such an effect, it is possible to notify in advance the launch direction of the game ball after the end of the special game state. The execution timing of the effect may be any timing during the special game state, for example, during a specific round or ending.

Further, as an effect, the first specific game state and the second specific game state are shown as candidates for the game state to be transferred, and one of them is selected by roulette or the like. In this way, by making it seem as if the game state to be shifted by lottery was set, the game state is shifted to a disadvantageous game state because the special result is derived in the special figure fluctuation display game that is not the main fluctuation special figure. It is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and disappointment when doing so. Especially for a player who does not know that the game state to be shifted differs depending on whether or not it is the main fluctuation special figure.
In the special gaming state, even though the gaming ball has flowed into the probabilistic operating region 38h of the first special variable winning device 38, the gaming state shifts to a more unfavorable gaming state than expected, resulting in a sense of discomfort or disappointment. However, by executing an effect such as performing a lottery, it is possible to make the player think that the game has shifted to a disadvantageous game state due to the fact that the lottery is not performed, and it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort and disappointment.

In addition, even if the launch direction is switched within a predetermined period immediately after the main fluctuation special map is switched or within a predetermined number of games, the game ball that has already been launched wins a prize in the starting winning opening that is not the main starting area. It is conceivable that a special figure fluctuation display game that is not the main fluctuation special figure is executed and a special result is obtained in the special figure fluctuation display game, but in this way, the special figure fluctuation display game that is not the main fluctuation special figure is unintentionally When the special result is derived in, it is considered that the player does not recognize that the special result is derived in the special figure variation display game that is not the main variation special figure. In such a case, the above-mentioned lottery is performed. It is especially effective to perform the kind of production that you do.

9 and 10 show fluctuation patterns of the special figure fluctuation display game. FIG. 9A shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3. As described above, in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game, so that the player mainly advances the game mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. With respect to the special figure 2, regardless of which fluctuation pattern is selected, a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. The length variation time is about 10 minutes, but it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

That is, in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game is longer than the fluctuation time that can be determined as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variation display game. It has become. The probability of a small hit is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 1 variable display game, but by setting the variable time to a long time in the case of a missed result or a small hit described later, the normal game state ST1 and In the second specific game state ST3, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the special figure 1 variable display game is provided to the player. I mainly try to advance the game. Then, as described above, even if a big hit occurs in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the special figure 1 variable display game is prevented from shifting to the first specific game state ST2. It is more disadvantageous than that, and the player is made to proceed mainly with the special figure 1 variable display game.

FIG. 9B shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in the first specific gaming state ST2. It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern is not set for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game because the lottery result may not be out of order. Further, for the special figure 1 variation display game, only one variation pattern is selected. In this first specific game state ST2, the above-mentioned normal game state ST1
And, contrary to the case of the second specific game state ST3, the special figure 2 variation display game is set as the main variation.
Special Figure 1 Variable display The game is designed to have irregular fluctuations.

Here, the variation time when the deviation result is obtained in the special figure 1 variation display game in which the irregular variation occurs in the first specific gaming state ST2 is the irregular variation in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3. Fig. 2 Fluctuation time when a deviation result occurs in the variation display game (Fig. 9 (Fig. 9)
It is set shorter than a)). This is the first specific gaming state ST2 as described later.
In the case where a short time is set as the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit or a small hit, and further, in the first specific game state ST2, the lottery result of the special figure 2 variable display game is missed. Because there is no.

That is, in the first specific game state ST2 in which the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and the game can be executed efficiently in terms of time, the special figure 1 variable display game having a missing result as a result of the lottery is clearer. It is disadvantageous, and it is possible for the player to proceed mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game without setting such a long variable time. Therefore, it is not necessary to set an unnecessarily long fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game, but when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed at the same time, the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly used. As the game progresses, the fluctuation time is set to be sufficiently longer than the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the game is forcibly stopped by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game.

FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3. With respect to the special figure 2, only the fluctuation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is larger than the fluctuation time which can be selected when the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit. It may be a long fluctuation time. Further, as described above, even if the result is a big hit in the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3 and the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h, the second specific game state ST3 is obtained. In order to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous when a big hit occurs due to irregular fluctuations, the game is encouraged to execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is the main fluctuation.

FIG. 10B shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in the first specific gaming state ST2. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected. In particular, for the special figure 1 variable display game, the second shortest variable time is selected when compared including the variable time that can be selected when a big hit or a small hit is made in the special figure 2 variable display game. ing. As a result, even in the first specific game state ST2, the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game that is irregularly changed stops before the special figure 2 variable display game that is the main variable is increased, and the special figure 1 variable display is displayed. The jackpot of the game is less likely to be forcibly changed to a missed result. Although the variation pattern of Special Figure 2 is sorted according to the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be determined by a random number or the like.

FIG. 10C shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3. With respect to the special figure 2, the reach state is not generated, and the long fluctuation in which the fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. FIG. 10 (d) shows the first
The fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in the specific game state ST2 is shown. None of them generate a reach state, and a fluctuation pattern with a very short fluctuation time is selected. The special figure 1 variable display game has the same time as the case of the loss in the first specific game state ST2, but this is also forced by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game as in the case of the loss. It's enough time to be stopped. Regarding the fluctuation time when the special figure 1 variable display game is missed or a small hit in the first specific game state ST2, it is a sufficient time to be forcibly stopped by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. If so, the time may be shorter than the time shown here.

From the above, the special results include the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state and the second special game that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the state is included.

By doing so, it is possible to play a game according to the design of the game machine. That is, when an act of intentionally aiming at the special figure 2 variable display game having a higher probability of occurrence of a small hit than the special figure 1 variable display game is performed in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the game machine is designed. This will greatly exceed the profit that can be given to the player as expected in. However, by setting the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game and setting the game state to be shifted when a big hit occurs when the special figure 2 variable display game is not the main variable special figure, the special figure is set as described above. 2 It is possible to prevent intentional aiming when the variable display game is not the main variable special figure.
In addition, by making it possible to make the game value to be given different depending on whether or not it is the main fluctuation special figure, the degree of freedom in designing the game machine such as the jackpot probability, the type, and the number of time reductions is increased. It will be possible to develop a wider variety of game machines.

In the following description, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variable display game. Further, when the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a decorative special figure variable display game. Also,
When the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, it is simply called a hit (special result). When the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a big hit, and the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on a small hit, are not distinguished, it is simply referred to as a special gaming state.

In the game machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game ball (from a launching device (not shown) toward the game area 32 (
The game is performed by launching a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by the direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35 and the first starting winning opening 36, 2nd start winning opening 37
, 1st special variable winning device 38 or 2nd special variable winning device 39, or a game area 32
It flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost part of the above and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of winning opening is changed. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 11) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15.

The winning balls to the first starting winning opening 36 are detected as the starting winning balls of the special figure 1 variable display game by the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided inside, and a predetermined upper limit number (1st starting memory) (
For example, up to 4) are stored. Special Figure 1 The variable display game can be started, and
When the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36 while the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory is stored with the generation of the start right, and the first start memory number is added by 1. At the same time, the special figure 1 variation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory, and at this time, the first start memory number is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. In addition, when the game ball wins in the first start winning opening 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is added by 1 and one first start memory is stored. .. Then, when the special figure 1 variable display game can be started in a state where the first start memory number is 1 or more (the end of the previous special figure 1 variable display game or the end of the special game state), the first The number of start memories is subtracted by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

The winning ball to the second starting winning opening 37 is detected as the starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by the starting opening 2 switch 37a provided inside. If there is a prize in the second start winning opening 37 in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state is set. In addition, even if the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 37, the second start memory does not occur. In addition, when the second start winning opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, the second start memory is temporarily generated for the convenience of processing, but the second start memory is Since it will be digested immediately, the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random value, a jackpot symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 11). The special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as the special figure start memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times for the first start memory). Then, the stored number of the special figure start memory is the memory display unit 54 (special figure 1) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50.
In addition to being displayed on the hold display), it is also displayed on the display device 41 of the center case 40 as a decorative special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first variable display device) based on the winning of the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory, and the second start. Winning opening 3
Based on the winning prize in 7, the special figure 2 variable display game is played on the special figure 2 display device 52 (second variable display device). The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but while one special figure variable display game is being executed, the other special figure variable display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If this happens, one of the special figure variation display games is terminated as a result other than the special result (missing result).

In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after performing the variable display in the display mode as shown in FIG. 4 (b), the predetermined result mode is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special game state (so-called big hit state). Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result (small hit result mode). Then, it becomes a small hit and becomes a second special game state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first variable display means capable of displaying the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 is the second based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37.
It serves as a second variable display means capable of displaying a variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game).

In addition, in response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decorative identification information (numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) are variablely displayed on the display device (image display device) 41. The decoration special figure variation display game to be made is to be executed. The decorative special figure variable display game includes a decorative special figure 1 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and a decorative special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and these are separate. Is displayed in the display area of. Then, the variation display is performed according to the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and the display corresponding to the result is performed according to the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special figure variation display game.

That is, the display device 41 changes the decoration identification information in accordance with the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). It is a decorative variation display means that can display a decorative special figure variation display game). It should be noted that different display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one of the decorative special figure variable display games may be displayed. In addition, game machine 1
The special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 at 0.

FIG. 11 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. ..

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer (IC) called an amusement chip (IC).
It includes a CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operating clock of the CPU, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 include DC32V, DC12V, and D generated by the power supply device 400.
A predetermined level of DC voltage such as C5V is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 generates the DC voltage of DC32V from the AC power supply of 24V.
A power supply voltage is applied to the normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter or a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V or DC5V from a DC32V voltage and the internal RAM of the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure. Supply backup power supply unit 420
The game control device 100 is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the occurrence and recovery of a power failure.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the above, it is possible to exclude the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power source is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100.
The data supplied to 1 (particularly the built-in RAM) and stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or power failure. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200. Is done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 is a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, Read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and RA that can be read and written at any time
It is provided with M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (program, fixed data, determination value of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and the storage area of various signals and random numbers during game control. It is used as. ROM111B or RAM11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. When the special result mode is adopted, the gaming state is advantageous for the player (special gaming state).
At the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed in the game machine 10
A display state in which the display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. No display mode. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. A display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). State that became identification information,
However, the special result mode may be set to the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 reach) and premier reach are set. The expected value is no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <
It is getting higher in the order of premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the game microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random generation to generate variation pattern random numbers for determining various reach and variation display game execution time in non-reach variation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the general clock variation display game. It is provided with a circuit and a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A and a clock that gives an update timing of a random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. ing.

Further, the CPU 111A is the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game.
Acquire any one of the fluctuation pattern tables stored in. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state. One of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables based on the number of start storages and the like. Here, CPU111A
Is a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when the special figure variation display game is executed.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

Various switches and sensors are connected to the input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111. Then, a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and an interface chip that converts the signal into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V (
Proximity I / F) 121a, 121b are provided. Proximity I / F121a, 121b
When the input range is set to 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut and floats. It is configured to be able to detect various states and output an abnormality detection signal.

In the proximity I / F 121a, 121b, the gate switch 34a in the normal drawing start gate 34,
The winning opening switch 35a in the general winning opening 35, the upper large winning opening switch 38a in the first special variable winning device 38, the lower large winning opening switch 39a in the second special variable winning device 39, and the first special variable winning device 38. Probability change operation area switch 38d provided in the probability change operation area 38h, start port 1 switch 36a in the first start winning opening 36, start port 2 switch 37 in the second start winning opening 37
a, Passage switch 38g for detecting game balls that did not flow into the probability variation operating region 38h in the first special variation winning device 38, discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting game balls discharged from the first special variation winning device 38e , The board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine is connected.

The outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b are the second input port 123 and the third input port 12.
It is supplied to No. 4 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the gate switch 34a and the winning opening switch 35
a, upper prize opening switch 38a, lower prize opening switch 39a, probability variation operation area switch 38
d, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are the second input port 12
It is input to 3.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the passage port switch 38g, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected. Is input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 is provided with a magnetic sensor 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the game machine 10.
And the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10.
The detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 is also input. Further, a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (the payout control device 200 can accept commands). A signal indicating whether or not it is in a normal state) is also input. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 and the output of the passage switch 38g among the outputs to the third input port 124 are the main board 100.
Is also supplied to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the game microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. ..

As described above, the proximity I / F 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to the voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become like.

The data held by the second input port 123 is an enable signal CE by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changing to a valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detecting a radio wave) and a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 indicates whether or not the command can be accepted), payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating payout abnormality), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (it is full)), and a touch switch signal (for input of the touch switch provided on the operation unit 24). A first input port 122 is provided which takes in (based on a signal) and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like, and the Schmidt buffer 125 is provided with these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from.
The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET whose noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided on the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, so that the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 is turned off in order to output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is used for each port 122, 123, of the input unit 120.
Not supplied to 124. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset in order to prevent system malfunction, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the game microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. It should be noted that the one-way communication is such that a signal cannot be input from the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of an accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The proximity I / F121a, 12
The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as the start port switch output from 1b, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the game machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. The port on the relay board 70 has a game microcomputer 11
The chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 includes an upper large winning opening solenoid 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the first special variable winning device 38, a lower large winning opening solenoid 39b to open the second special variable winning device 39, and the first. A second output port 134 for outputting operation data of the lever solenoid 38f that operates the lever member 38i in the special variable winning device 38 is provided. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with information about the game machine 10, such as jackpot information, from the external information terminal plate 7.
A fifth output port 137 for outputting to 1 is provided. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and can provide information about the game machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the operation data signals of the upper winning opening solenoid 38b, the lower winning opening solenoid 39b, and the lever solenoid 38f output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. 1 Driver (drive circuit) 138a, output from the 2nd driver 138b, 4th output port 136 that outputs the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the 3rd output port 135 External information terminal board 71 outputs an external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137, which output the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50, to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d that outputs to is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 2 and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each game machine to an external inspection device 500. Photocoupler 13
No. 9 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning opening 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning opening 37, the winning opening switch 35a, and the upper large winning opening switch The 38a, the lower grand prize opening switch 39a, the probability variation operation area switch 38d in the first special variable winning device 38, the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and the passage port switch 38g are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and when a metal approaches the coil. A non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes is used.
Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC) similar to the gaming microcomputer 111.
), And VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , Sound source LSI 314 that controls the sound output to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
Is equipped with.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read-only memory) storing programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and stored contents even if power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. A FeRAM 323 that can be held and an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the VDP 312 about the content of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 of the reproduced sound, lights the decorative lamp, and the motor. And the drive control of the solenoid, the management of the production time, and so on.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging / reducing an image. Further, the VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30 from the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311.
C, a synchronization signal STS that gives the data transmission timing is input. In addition, VDP312
Waits to notify the main control microcomputer 311 that it is in a state of waiting for reception of interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is transmitted to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the sound source LSI 314 are connected via the address / data bus 340. Further, the interrupt signal INT from the sound source LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311.
Is to be entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19b provided on the front frame 12, and is generated by the sound source LSI 314. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The effect control command signal (effect command) is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 via this command I / F331, such as a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a variation command, and a stop information command. ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
Operates at DC 5V, and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V. Therefore, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 and a glass frame 15 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). Frame decoration LED control circuit 333, game board 3 that drives and controls a frame decoration device having an provided LED (light emitting diode) (for example, frame decoration device 18 or the like).
Board effect device 44 (for example, display device 41) provided at 0 (including the center case 40)
A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided to drive and control a movable accessory (such as a movable accessory) that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display in. These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. Even if the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. A function that detects the on / off state of the effect switch 47 (effect motor switch) and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.
A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 has the effect control device 300 having the above configuration.
DC32V for driving a motor or solenoid, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving a motor or LED, in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the electronic components controlled by the motor DC5 which is the power supply voltage of command I / F331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC15V for driving a motor, LED, and speaker. Further, as the main control microcomputer 311, 3.3V or 1.2V
When using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as, DC 3.3V based on DC 5V
And a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in the reset state. In addition, VDP312 (VDPSET signal) and sound source LSI314 are output from the main control microcomputer 311.
, The amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) that drives the speaker, and the control circuits 332-334 (IORESET signal) that drive and control the lamps and motors are supplied to reset the state. Further, the effect control device 300 has a cooling FA that cools various parts of the game machine 10.
The cooling FAN 45 is driven when the N45 is connected and the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

In these control circuits, the starting port 1 switch 36 provided in the first starting winning opening 36
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from a, the random value for determining the jackpot of the special figure 1 variation display game is extracted and the first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The jackpot determination random value or the like in the first start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss or the variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning opening 37, the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variation display game is extracted and the second is stored in the RAM 111C. Memorize the start memory. The jackpot determination random value and the like in the second start memory are compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B.
Special Figure 2 Variable display Performs processing to determine the hit / miss and fluctuation pattern of the game. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and temporarily stores the information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game. , Special Figure 2 The start of the variable display game is not suspended.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the above-mentioned special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 30.
Output to 0. Then, an identification symbol (identification information) is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.
Is displayed for a predetermined time, and then the special figure variation display game for which the stop display is displayed is displayed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100.
Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also displays the special result mode and the special game. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the upper prize winning opening solenoid 38b, so that the game ball can flow into the upper winning opening. Control to do. Alternatively, the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 is provided by the lower winning opening solenoid 39b.
Is opened, and control is performed to allow the inflow of game balls into the lower prize opening.

Then, the large winning opening is opened until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls is awarded in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means that controls opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 operates a lever solenoid 38 that operates a lever member 38i that regulates the inflow of the first special variable winning device 38 into the probability variation operation region 38h in the special game state.
Control f. Then, the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h, and the probability variation operation region switch 3
Based on what was detected in 8d (with V passing), it is possible to generate a high probability state after the end of the special gaming state. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the low probability state. Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in the special figure variable display game, the high probability state is reached.
Both the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are in a high probability state. That is, the game control device 100 controls the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39) and the operating mode of the inflow control member (lever member 38i). Make a means.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 13 and 14 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 17 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 13, first, the process of disabling interrupts (step X1) is performed, and then the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs. Stack pointer setting process to set (step X2)
)I do. Next, register bank 0 is specified (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the RAM address is 0000h to 01FFh, and the upper rank is 00.
Take h or 01h, and set the first 00h in step X4. Next, the launch stop signal is output and the launch permission signal is set to the prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a launch stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

After that, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6),
The process of setting the power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 200 or an effect control device 300) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device Can be prevented from missing a command. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

Further, the power-on delay timer is timed by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to the validity judgment) that is not subject to the validity judgment (checksum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of a RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area for calculation, so that it is possible to prevent the control at the time of power-on from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122.
By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the initialization switch 11
The operation of 2 can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power-on to the standby time. You need to keep doing it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such annoying operations, and the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed.
First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step X8), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step X9).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X10;
N) returns to the determination (step X9) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. in this way,
By determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem when the power is turned on. ..

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained. Therefore, when a power failure occurs here, backup processing is performed. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step X12). If the timer value is non-zero (step X
12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step X8). When the timer value is 0 (step X).
12; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is given to the RWM (read / write memory) that can be read and written in RAM, EEPROM, etc. (step X13), and off-data is output (output) to all output ports. (Set to the state where there is no) (step X14).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step X15) and read first. However, it is determined from the state of the first input port 122 whether the initialization switch is turned on (step X16).

When the initialization switch is off (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17), and it is normal. If (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X).
18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19).
Determine if the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (step X2)
0). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), step X21 in FIG.
And perform the processing when it recovers normally from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or
When it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17)
N or step X18; N), checksum is not normal (step X20; N)
If it is determined, the process proceeds to step X23 of FIG. 14 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make up.

In step X21 of FIG. 14, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (
Step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indefinite state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area that stores the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the state of the touch switch signal is set to an indefinite state indicating that the state has not been determined.

After that, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X22), and the step. Proceed to X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As the screen designation command, if both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are in the normal processing described later, that is, the special figure variation display game is not being executed and the special game state is not being executed, the customer is waiting. Send the command of the waiting demo screen, otherwise send the command of the recovery screen. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are included. Clear the RAM area to 0 (step X24) and set the RAM access prohibited area to access prohibited (step X2).
5). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X2).
6). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of this embodiment, step X27
Then, the model specification command, the special figure 1 hold number command, the probability information command, and the RAM initialization command (display the customer waiting demo screen and R for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) with light and sound.
A plurality of commands such as (command for notifying AM initialization) are transmitted. In addition to these commands, depending on the model, a production count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

In step X28, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) that generates the timer interrupt signal and the random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator).
Performs the process of starting the circuit. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the setting of the code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in the predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is set by the CPU 111.
Performed by A. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. The bit transposition pattern is a method of exchanging the extracted random number bits (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) when they are exchanged in a predetermined order and stored as different bit arrangements (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). It is a pattern that determines. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on.
RWM is specified as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers (large hit symbol random numbers, small hit symbol random numbers) that determine the hit symbol of the special figure). After saving in the area (step X30), the interrupt is permitted (step X31). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X32) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. CTC output with the same cycle (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing)
It is a "slow counter" that is updated based on. Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. It should be noted that each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or -1, or a random-type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

The number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus after the initial value random number update process in step X32.
Is set (step X33), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X3).
4). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the initial value random number update process (step X34; N)
Return to step X32). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X32) (step X31), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to avoid the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In addition to the main process, the initial value random number update process in step X32 may be performed in the timer interrupt process as well. If such a method is adopted, both are initially used. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to release the interrupt, but as in the present embodiment. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing.
This has the advantage of simplifying the main process.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35).
.. Then, when the power failure monitoring signal is not continuously turned on for the number of checks (step X3).
5; N) returns to the determination (step X34) of whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step X36).
), The process of outputting off-data to all output ports (step X37) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step X38).
), The power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step X39).
Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process (step X41) for saving the calculated checksum, the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step X42), it waits for the power of the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means sets a predetermined standby time for delaying the activation of the main control means and waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device). 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data and
An initialization operation unit (initialization switch) that can be operated from the outside, an initialization means (game control device 100) that initializes the data stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit, and The operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 15 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19, X4) in the above-mentioned main process.
0) was shown. In this checksum calculation process, first, RW is used as the starting value of the calculated address.
The start address of M is set (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52).
, “0” is set as the calculated value (step X53). RA used for the number of repetitions
The number of bytes of M is set.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step X5).
4), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (step X57). If the calculation is not completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 16 shows the initial value random number update process (step X32) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is completed. Here, the "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol in the special symbol variation display game, and the "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the special symbol variation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. That is, it is an interrupt routine that is started in a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the game microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and FIG. 17
Timer interrupt processing is started.

When the timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step X1).
01). By switching to the register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, the register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM start address is set in a predetermined register (for example, the D register) (step X102). In step X102, the same processing as in step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register banks are different. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step X103) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step X104) for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (upper prize winning opening solenoid 38b, lower winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed. When the firing stop signal is output in step X5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, the signal is not processed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the launch permission status as seen from the game control device, and the second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission status as seen from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball is configured to be ready for launch.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step X105), the random number update process 1 (step X106), which outputs the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200,
Random number update process 2 (step X107) is performed. After that, monitoring of whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper winning opening switch 38a, and the lower winning opening switch 39a, and monitoring of errors. Winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108) to perform (whether the front frame or glass frame is open, etc.)
)I do.

Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are used based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37.
Is extracted. Then, the special figure 1 game process (step X110) for processing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) for performing the special figure 2 variable display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), which checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether there is an abnormality, and panel radio error, which checks the detection signal from the panel radio sensor 62 and determines whether there is an abnormality. Monitoring process (step X1
14) is performed. Further, an external information editing process (step X115) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer.

Next, the probability change operation area switch monitoring process (step X116) is performed. In this probability change operation area switch monitoring process, the probability change operation area switch 38d provided in the probability change operation area 38h
Performs a process of monitoring the detection of the game ball in. After that, the lever solenoid control process (step X117) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed to end the timer interrupt process. Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting interrupts) and the process of restoring the register bank designation (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) are interrupt return processes. Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Depending on the CPU used, some gaming machines need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process of restoring the register bank designation.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step X103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 18, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121).
). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X122), and the state of the read input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X1).
24), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X126), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and the switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

After that, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X).
129), the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing the unused bit data (step X131), the bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), and the switch reading process (step X133) is performed.
End the input process.

In the present embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or another memory.
Further, as the information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, the information prepared corresponding to each input port is used.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps X128, X133) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 19, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step X141). And 8
If there is an unused bit in the bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step X1).
42) After inverting the bits that need to be inverted (step X143), the bits are saved (stored) in the port input state 1 of the target switch control area (step X144). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step X146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is used. Save (store) in (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second reads (step X150).
The logical product of the fixed bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken and used as the fixed bit this time (step X151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second reads (step X152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt. The product is taken and used as the last holding bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step X154), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time is taken, and saved as the rising edge (step X155). The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read once for each interrupt process, and the signal is changed by comparing with the result of the previous read. There is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been executed, but if this is done, the correct determination may not be made if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step X104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 20, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 11) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper prize-winning port solenoid 38b and the lower prize-winning port solenoid 39b is combined and output (step X162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is updated.
The output data of the digit line of (step X164) is acquired, and the acquired information and the external information data are combined (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step X167), and the loaded data is loaded into the segment output port 135.
Is output to (step X168).

Then, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and synthesized (step X169).
), Combine the combined data and the output data of the launch permission (step X170), and output the combined data to the port 137 for external information output (step X171). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the relay board 7 is combined.
The combined data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on 0 (step X175). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176) to end the output process.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 21, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and the winning number counter area 1 and the winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used for transmitting a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prizes for which the payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a prize ball command counter that can store information related to the prize ball command.

The prize number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main prize ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number) generated by winning a prize in the prize opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). The winning data corresponding to the prize balls that are used and have not been processed to generate the main prize ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main prize ball signal counter that can store information about the main prize ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, the payout control device 200 also outputs a payout prize ball signal to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). By collating these two signals,
It is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

Each of these prize number counter areas is provided with a prize number counter area for each prize ball number set for each prize opening (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). Therefore, the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is added by 1 based on the winning of the winning opening. That is, it is possible to store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is allocated to a wider area than the winning number counter area 2, so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the destination, whereas the payout command may suspend the transmission depending on the state of the payout control device 200 which is the destination, and more untransmitted signals are sent. This is because data may be accumulated.

In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 2 (step X181), among a plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, the prize number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not. Then, when there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X183; N), step X1
Return to 81 and repeat the above process.

If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X18).
4), the number of payouts corresponding to the target winning number counter area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the acquired number of payouts are added to obtain a new remaining number of prize balls (step X1).
86), save in the remaining number of prize balls area (step X187). As the value of the prize ball remaining number region before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

After that, 10 is subtracted from the addition result, which is a predetermined number that serves as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (
Step X188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, since the subtracted result is not saved in the prize ball remaining number area, the value before subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining number area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y)
Updates the value of the main prize ball signal output number region by +1 (step X190), saves the subtraction result in the prize ball remaining number region (step X191), and returns to step X188.

As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. .. By outputting the main prize ball signal, when the payout of game balls such as during a big hit is concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accuracy generated during the big hit It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (step X193).
If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process ends. When the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y).
) Determines whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start the payout control, and if the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be accepted. That is, the payout busy signal forms a state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle state or payout that can immediately start payout control. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an indefinite state in which the state is indefinite is set.

The indefinite state is set by clearing the busy signal flag area, for example, by processing when the power is turned on. This indefinite state is set to an idle state or a busy state based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be started. It will be solved with. That is, when a power failure occurs and recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the continuous output of the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 without transmission. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

When the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. Here, even if the state is indefinite, it is determined that the user is busy. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start the payout control and does not send the payout command, it is possible to perform unnecessary processing by not performing the subsequent processing related to the transmission of the payout command. It is designed to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

When the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the prize number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number, the prize number counter area to be checked is "0". Determine if there is a count that is not.

When there is no count in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are displayed. It is determined whether the count number check is completed (step X197). With this determination, all checks are completed (step X19).
7; If Y) is determined, the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above process is repeated.

Further, in step X195, when it is determined that there is a count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step). X198), the payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written to the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is completed. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and the initial value is, for example, 200 ms.
Is set.

As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one prize in the prize area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls based on this payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start the payout control can start the payout control. If the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means, the prize ball command is transmitted.

In this way, the game control device 100 controls to transmit the prize ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200. Therefore, the prize is awarded only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winning that has not been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and backed up by the payout control device 200. Accurate payout control can be realized without having a function to do so.

In a conventional game machine (for example, a game machine of JP-A-2000-321759), when a power cutoff state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data to its own storage means and immediately before the power cutoff. It is trying to maintain the payout control state based on the data of. However, conventional gaming machines require a backup function, so
There was a problem that it led to cost increase. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized even if the payout control device 200 does not have a function for backing up.

In addition, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the prize ball is paid out by an external device such as a hall computer. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be accurately grasped. Further, since the prize ball command counter that can store the information about the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter that can store the information about the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. The signal information can be managed separately, and the information can be managed reliably.

Based on the above, the game is controlled comprehensively, and the winning areas provided in the game area 32 (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38). , The game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the second special variable prize device 39), and the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means.
A state including a payout control means (payout control device 200) for controlling the payout of the game ball, and the game control means indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. A state in which a prize ball command is transmitted to a payout control means based on a signal (busy signal), and when a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the payout control means can start payout control. Even if the signal is output, the prize ball command is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control means is continuously output for a predetermined period. Correspondingly, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, in the game area 32, winning areas having different numbers of winning balls (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) are provided. A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) are provided, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls has not been transmitted for each number of prize balls. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal is transmitted, and the identification of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control is performed before the identification of whether or not each prize ball command counter has an untransmitted prize ball command. You are trying to do it.

In addition, the game is controlled in a comprehensive manner, and the predetermined winning areas (first starting winning opening 36, second)
Starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 3
A game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to 9).
) And a payout control means (payout control device 200) that controls payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means, and the game control means is output from the payout control means. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started.
External information that outputs a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the game control device 100) and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is won in a predetermined winning area to the outside of the game machine. The external information output means includes an output means (game control device 100), and the state signal output from the payout control means is a prize ball signal regardless of whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control. It means that the output of is performed.

Further, even if the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) indicates that the payout control can be started when a power failure occurs and the player recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) that can store information about the prize ball command and a prize that can store information about the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmitting means (game control device 100) is provided with a predetermined winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35). , The first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39) is generated in units of one winning ball command, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) is provided with information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. Is memorable, and is updated when the game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, and is updated in correspondence with the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, so that the prize ball command that has not been transmitted is updated. The number of prize balls is memorable, and the external information output means accumulates the number of prize balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the predetermined winning area, and outputs the prize ball signal every time the accumulated value reaches the predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is configured to be output to the outside of the game machine, and can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in the predetermined winning area, and the winning ball is won in the predetermined winning area. By updating at times and updating in correspondence with the cumulative processing of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been cumulatively processed.

[Random number update process 1]
In FIG. 22, the random number update process 1 (step X1) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17) is shown.
06) was shown. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).
When the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is supported. It is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be used (step X223). After that, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

When the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. Also, when the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224).
Y) is a register that loads the small hit symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (step X225) and holds the start value of the random number counter (random number area) corresponding to the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number. (Start value setting register) is set (step X226), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 23 shows the random number update process 2 (step X1) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17).
07) was shown. The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and the random number update process 2 updates both of them. Then, each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is the top 1.
It is configured to be executed for either bytes or the lower 1 byte.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step X233). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this is used). (Called the masked value)
Set the mask update value by adding "1", and set the lower 1 byte to "0" (step X2).
37), the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set.
The byte is set to the above mask update value (step X238), and the process proceeds to step X239.
In addition, adding "1" to the masked value may result in the masked value being "0".
This is to avoid adding "0" later because it does not change from the value before the addition.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239), and when it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number region to be updated is set (step X240). , Step X242. When the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. ) Is set (step X2)
41), the process proceeds to step X242.

In step X242, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step). X243). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is used as the new random number value again (step X244), and this value is set to 1. Byte random number or 2
Save in the random number area lower than the byte random number (step X245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. In the case of a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step X247). )
, The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A has a variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the start region of the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37. It serves as a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining.

[Winning opening switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 24 shows a winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 17). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to the upper winning opening switch 38a in the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step X301), and the large winning opening monitoring table 1 is prepared. Illegal & winning monitoring process that monitors whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the winning opening is not open and detects normal winning (
Step X302) is executed.

In the winning opening monitoring table (fraud monitoring table), a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input in the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the fraudulent winning number area, and a fraudulent winning error Information on the notification command, the upper limit of the number of illegal winnings (the number of illegal winning judgments), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) are defined. Further, in the winning opening switch table, information on the number of times of monitoring (the number of switches), the monitoring switch bit, the address of the winning number counter area 1 and the address of the winning number counter area 2 is defined. These fraud monitoring tables and winning tables are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

After that, the other lower grand prize opening switch 39 in the lower grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39)
The winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to a is prepared (step X303), and fraud & winning monitoring processing (step X304) for monitoring whether or not there is an illegal winning and detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, prepare a winning opening monitoring table (here, starting opening 1 switch 36a, starting opening 2 switch 37a, winning opening switch 35a of general winning opening 35) that can always win a prize (step X305), and the number of winnings. Winning number counter update process (step X30)
6) is performed. Then, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state scheduled to be executed mainly for the special figure 1 variable display game is performed (step X307).

Next, the status scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and the signals whose status should be monitored and which switch or signal is to be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This status scan counter is updated in the range 0-3. afterwards,
The game machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X309). Then, a game machine state check process (step X310) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 1, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of switch connector disconnection or the like. When the value of the status scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the status based on the shoot-out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, the status monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

Next, the game machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X311). Then, a game machine state check process (step X312) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 2, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status monitoring based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and the status scan is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the front frame opening detection switch is set. Further, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, the monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is 0 (step X313), and if the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the process proceeds to step X317. In this case, there is no status monitoring target in the game machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. When the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y).
) Prepares the game machine state monitoring table 3 (step X314), and performs the game machine state check process (step X315) to determine the state such as whether an error has occurred.

By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the game machine status monitoring table 3, if the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status can be monitored based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of the switch connector disconnection or the like. Set. It should be noted that the game machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counters are 1 to 3.

After that, the payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting the busy signal flag based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start the payout control is performed, and the process proceeds to step X317. Since the processes of steps X314 to X316 are executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, 4
It will be executed once for each timer interrupt. That is, the timer interrupt is 4 m.
If it is performed every s, the processes of steps X314 to X316 are performed every 16 ms.

Next, a V abnormal passage monitoring process (step X317) for monitoring the detection of an abnormal input by the probability variation operation area switch 38d is performed, and a remaining ball monitoring process (step X318) for monitoring the game ball remaining in the upper flow path 38j. I do. Further, a discharge ball monitoring process (step X319) for monitoring the game ball remaining in the lower flow path 38k is performed to end the winning opening switch / state monitoring process.

[V abnormal passage monitoring process]
FIG. 25 shows the V abnormal passage monitoring process (step X317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this V abnormal passage monitoring process, first, the probability variation operation region 38
It is determined whether h is valid (step X251). The probabilistic operating region 38h is in effect when the detection of the game ball by the probabilistic operating region switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 7). When the probability variation operation region 38h is active (step X251; Y), the process proceeds to step X258. Further, when the probability variation operation region 38h is not effective (step X25).
1; N) determines whether or not there is an input in the probability variation operation area switch (step X252).

Then, when there is no input in the probability change operation area switch (step X252; N), the process proceeds to step X258. In addition, when there is an input in the probability change operation area switch (step X25)
2; Y) performs the process related to the occurrence of the V abnormal passage error after step X253. The lever member 38i can flow into the probability variation operation region 38h only in a state where the lever member 38i is retracted from the probability variation operation region 38h. The period during which the probability change operation area switch 38d is effective is started when the lever member 38i is retracted, and the game ball that has flowed in after the lever member 38i is in a state of covering the probability change operation area 38h is in the probability change operation area. It ends when a predetermined time sufficient to be detected by the switch 38d has elapsed, or when the lever member 38i covers the probability variation operation region 38h. Therefore, when the probability variation operation area switch 38d is not active, the fact that the probability variation operation area switch 38d has an input is an abnormal state that does not normally occur, and processing related to the occurrence of a V abnormal passage error is performed.

In the process related to the occurrence of a V abnormal passage error, first, the initial value in the V abnormal passage notification timer area (
Here, a value corresponding to 60 seconds) is saved (step X253), and it is determined whether the value in the V abnormal passage flag area is the error-generating flag (step X254). Then, when the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is the error occurrence flag (step X254; Y), that is, when the error has already occurred, the V abnormal passage monitoring process is terminated.

Further, when the value of the V abnormal passage flag area is not the error occurring flag (step X254).
; N), that is, when an error is determined in this processing, the error occurring flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step X255), and the V abnormal passage occurrence command is prepared (step X256). After that, the effect command setting process is performed (step X257).
, V Ends the abnormal passage monitoring process. The effect control device 300 performs a process of notifying an error when a V abnormal passage occurrence command is received.

On the other hand, when the process proceeds to step X258, it is determined whether the V abnormality passage notification timer is 0 (step X258). Then, when the V abnormal passage notification timer is 0 (step X).
258; Y) ends the V abnormal passage monitoring process. In this case, the V abnormal passage error is not occurring. Further, when the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step X258; N).
) Updates the V abnormal passage notification timer by -1 (step X259), and determines whether the V abnormal passage notification timer has become 0 (step X260).

If the V abnormal passage notification timer is not 0 (step X260; N), the V abnormal passage monitoring process ends. In this case, the notification of the V abnormal passage error continues. When the V abnormal passage notification timer becomes 0 (step X260; Y), the normal status flag is saved in the V abnormal passage flag area (step X261), and the V abnormal passage release command is prepared (step X262). .. After that, the effect command setting process is performed (step X263).
, V Ends the abnormal passage monitoring process. The effect control device 300 performs a process of ending the error notification when the V abnormal passage release command is received.

[Residual ball monitoring process]
FIG. 26 shows the remaining ball monitoring process (step X318) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this remaining ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the passage port switch 38g that detects the game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h (step X271). If there is no input to the passage switch 38g (step X271; N), the process proceeds to step X273. Further, when there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step X27).
1; Y) is -1 unless the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is 0.
Update (step X272) and move to step X273.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step X273), and if there is no input (step X273; N), the process proceeds to step X275. Further, when there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step X273; Y), if the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is not 0, the remaining ball counter is updated by -1 (step X274).
The process proceeds to step X275.

Then, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the upper prize winning opening switch (step X275), and if there is no input (step X275; N), the process proceeds to step X278. When there is an input to the upper prize opening switch (step X275; Y), the remaining ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the upper flow path 38j is updated by +1 (step X276), and the remaining ball monitoring timer area is entered. The initial value of the timer is saved (step X277), and the process proceeds to step X278. The remaining ball monitoring timer is for determining a remaining ball error when the game ball stays in the upper flow path 38j for a long time. Here, as an initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time required from the inflow to the upper flow path 38j to the discharge without any abnormality is set. Further, since the value is updated by -1 by the following processing, it is set so that 3 seconds can be clocked by saving the value of +1 corresponding to 3 seconds as the initial value.

Next, it is determined whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step X278), and when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step X278; Y), that is, when there is no game ball in the upper flow path 38j, the remaining ball The error clearing flag is prepared (step X284), the remaining ball error clearing command is prepared (step X285), and the process proceeds to step X286.

On the other hand, when the remaining sphere counter is not 0 (step X278; N), that is, the upper flow path 3
If there is a game ball in 8j, it is determined whether a remaining ball error has already occurred (step X).
279). If a remaining ball error is already occurring (step X279; Y), the remaining ball monitoring process ends. Further, when the remaining ball error has not already occurred (step X279; N).
) Updates the remaining ball monitoring timer by -1 (step X280), and determines whether the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X281).

If the remaining ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step X281; N), the remaining ball monitoring process ends. When the remaining ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X281; Y), the remaining ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step X282), and the remaining ball error occurrence command is prepared (step X281).
Step X283). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag region (step X286).

When the prepared state flag matches the value of the remaining sphere error flag area (step X286)
Y) ends the remaining ball monitoring process. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the remaining ball error flag area (step X286; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the remaining ball error flag area (step X287), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X288), the remaining ball monitoring process is completed. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the remaining ball error release command.

That is, by the above processing, a predetermined time (from the last inflow of the game ball into the upper flow path 38j)
Here, if all the game balls are not discharged from the upper flow path 38j even after 3 seconds have passed, it is determined that the remaining ball error. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread attached in the upper flow path 38j.

[Discharge ball monitoring process]
FIG. 27 shows the discharge ball monitoring process (step X319) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this discharge ball monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e that detects the game ball discharged from the lower flow path 38k, that is, the game ball discharged from the first special variable winning device 38. (Step X411). Emission confirmation switch 3
If there is no input in 8e (step X411; N), the process proceeds to step X413. Also,
When there is an input to the discharge confirmation switch 38e (step X411; Y), the lower flow path 38k
If the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the game is not 0, update -1 (step X412).
, Step X413.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the passage port switch 38g for detecting the game ball that has not flowed into the probability variation operation region 38h (step X413), and when there is no input (step X413; N).
Goes to step X416. When there is an input to the passage port switch 38g (step X413; Y), the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step X414), and a timer is set in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The initial value is saved (step X415), and the process proceeds to step X416.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the probability variation operation area switch 38d that detects the game ball that has flowed into the probability variation operation area 38h (step X416), and if there is no input (step X416; N).
Goes to step X419. When there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch 38d (step X416; Y), the discharge ball counter that manages the number of game balls in the lower flow path 38k is updated by +1 (step X417), and the discharge ball monitoring timer area is set. Save the initial timer value (
Step X418) and step X419.

The passage port switch 38g and the probability variation operation area switch 38d also have a function as a switch for detecting the game ball flowing into the lower flow path 38k, and the discharge ball counter is increased by +1 based on the detection of the game ball by these switches. Update and save the timer initial value in the discharge ball monitoring timer area. The discharge ball monitoring timer is for determining a discharge ball error when the game ball stays in the lower flow path 38k for a long time. Here, as an initial value, a time sufficiently longer than the time required from the inflow to the lower flow path 38k to the discharge without any abnormality is set.
In addition, since the value is updated by -1 in the following processing, the initial value is +
It is set so that 3 seconds can be clocked by saving the value of 1.

Next, it is determined whether the discharge ball counter is 0 (step X419), and when the discharge ball counter is 0 (step X419; Y), that is, when there is no game ball in the lower flow path 38k, the discharge ball The error clearing flag is prepared (step X425), the discharge ball error clearing command is prepared (step X426), and the process proceeds to step X427.

On the other hand, when the discharge ball counter is not 0 (step X419; N), that is, the lower flow path 3
If there is a game ball within 8k, it is determined whether a discharge ball error has already occurred (step X).
420). Then, when the discharge ball error has already occurred (step X420; Y),
End the discharge ball monitoring process. Also, when the discharge ball error has not already occurred (step X4).
20; N) updates the discharge ball monitoring timer by -1 (step X421), and determines whether the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X422).

If the discharge ball monitoring timer is not 0 (step X422; N), the discharge ball monitoring process ends. When the discharge ball monitoring timer is 0 (step X422; Y), the discharge ball error occurrence flag is prepared (step X423), and the discharge ball error generation command is prepared (step X423).
Step X424). Then, it is determined whether the prepared state flag matches the value of the discharge ball error flag region (step X427).

When the prepared state flag matches the value in the discharge ball error flag area (step X427)
Y) ends the discharge ball monitoring process. If the prepared state flag does not match the value in the discharge ball error flag area (step X427; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the discharge ball error flag area (step X428), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X429), the discharge ball monitoring process is completed. The effect control device 300 performs a process of starting error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error occurrence command, and performs a process of ending the error notification based on the reception of the discharge ball error release command.

That is, by the above processing, a predetermined time (from the last inflow of the game ball into the lower flow path 38k)
Here, if all the game balls are not discharged from the lower flow path 38k even after 3 seconds), it is determined that the discharge ball error. This makes it possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as leaving a game ball (thread fishing ball) with a thread attached in the lower flow path 38k.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 28 shows fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps X302, X304) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is performed by the upper winning opening switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower winning opening switch 39 of the second special variable winning device 39.
This is a process performed on a. As for the large winning openings (special variable winning devices 38 and 39), it is easy to cheat by forcibly opening the opening / closing door to insert the game ball and pay out the winning ball.
In addition to detecting winnings, it also monitors fraud.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step X321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step X321).
Step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the upper large winning opening switch 38a, and the winning opening to be error-monitored. When the switch is the lower large winning opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step X323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X3).
32). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the number of illegal winnings of the target is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of illegal occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not the number exceeds (5) (step X325).

The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is sandwiched between the door members of the large winning opening, and the game ball is the valid period of the large winning opening switch. This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won after passing the mark or when there is noise in the signal, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number of determined items is not exceeded (step X325; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of determined items is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegally generated determinations (step X32).
6) Save the initial value (for example, 60,000 ms) in the target unauthorized winning notification timer area (for example, 60000 ms).
Step X327). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and the winning number counter update process (step X331) for setting the winning ball is performed. .. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (step X334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0. In this embodiment, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335), and if the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step X336), and the illegal prize release flag is set as the illegal flag. Prepare (step X337)
). Then, it is determined whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).
..

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( Step X339), the prepared rogue flag is compared with the value of the target rogue flag area (step X339).
Step X340). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X3).
38; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340).

Then, when the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area match (step X).
340; Y) ends the fraud & winning monitoring process. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step X340; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step X341), and the effect command setting process is performed. (
Step X342), end the fraud & winning monitoring process. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 29 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps X306, X331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening switch table of the winning opening monitoring table (step X351), and is input to the target winning opening switch (correctly, the input is changed). ) Is present (step X352).

When there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all switches is completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). Then, when overflow does not occur (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X356).
Step X357). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

After loading the value of the target winning number counter area 2 (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether or not it overflows (step X35).
9). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362). If an overflow occurs (step X3)
59; Y) updates the table address to the address of the next record (step X36).
1), it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step X352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step X362; Y), the winning number counter update process is completed.
By the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning in the winning area, and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting process]
FIG. 30 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-mentioned fraud & prize monitoring process.
)showed that. Note that this effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371).
, Determine if the transmit buffer is full (step X372).

If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), the command data (step X372; N)
Write MODE (upper byte) to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373)
), The status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374), and it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

If the transmit buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), the command data (step X375; N)
Write ACTION (lower byte) to the production serial transmission buffer (step X3)
76), the effect command setting process is terminated.

As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 300 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing]
FIG. 31 shows the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / status monitoring process (
Step X307) is shown. As described above, in the game machine of the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the case of the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3. It is conceivable that a non-player or a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game makes a right-handed hit. In the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process, a process is performed to notify such a player to perform a left-handed strike.

The abnormal fluctuation here means an irregular fluctuation, which is a non-main special figure fluctuation display game. Even in the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, it is possible to win a prize in the second start winning opening 37, so even if it is an irregular fluctuation, it is a legitimate special figure fluctuation display game, and a thread is attached. It is different from fraudulent acts such as executing a special figure variation display game by illegally detecting a prize by using a game ball or magnet, emitting radio waves, or the like. However, it is not preferable that the special figure fluctuation display game, which is determined to be the main in the design of the game machine, continues to be executed. Here, such irregular fluctuations are detected. The number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is counted, and when the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 reaches a specified value, the corresponding processing is performed.
Of course, even if you execute a special figure 2 fluctuation display game that causes irregular fluctuations by illegally detecting a prize at the second start winning opening 37 by using a game ball or magnet with a thread attached, emitting radio waves, etc. 2 The number of abnormal fluctuations is counted. That is, regardless of whether or not it is a fraudulent act, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is counted when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation is executed.

In this special figure 2 abnormality change monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 change check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is set when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in the state where the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable special figure (normal game state ST1 or second specific game state ST3). It is a flag. When the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is not present (step X381; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387). Further, when there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; Y),
The special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

Then, it is determined whether the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is smaller than the specified value (for example, 18) (step X3).
84) If it is smaller than the specified value (step X384; Y), it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). If it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable special figure (normal game state ST1).
Alternatively, if the special figure 2 abnormal variation number added by executing the special figure 2 variation display game in the second specific game state ST3) is not 0, the number is updated by -1 (step X385), and the special figure 1 variation number is changed. 0
It is cleared (step X386), and it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). The minimum value of the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is set to 0.

The special figure 2 check flag is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is started in the state where the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable special figure (normal game state ST1 or second specific game state ST3). It is a flag. Determining whether or not this special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is present (step X387)
), In the case where there is no special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387; N), step X
Move to 390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations is increased by +1.
It is updated (step X389), and it is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations in FIG. 2 is smaller than the specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

That is, the special figure 2 variable display game is started in the state where the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable special figure (normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game becomes irregular fluctuation. Fig. 2 The special figure 2 check flag is set based on the start of the variation display game, and based on the setting of this special figure 2 check flag, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number, which is the number of abnormality judgments, is updated in the abnormality occurrence direction ( Here, it will be added). In addition, in the state where the special figure 1 variable display game is the main variable special figure (normal game state ST1 or second specific game state ST3), special figure 1
The number of abnormalities released is updated (added here) based on the start of the variable display game, that is, the start of the special figure 1 variable display game that is the main fluctuation, and the abnormal release is released. Based on the number satisfying the predetermined condition, the number of abnormalities determined is updated (subtracted here) in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number. Therefore, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormality determination number management means for updating the abnormality determination number in the abnormality occurrence direction based on the start of the non-main variable display game.

Special figure 2 When the number of abnormal fluctuations is not smaller than the specified value (step X390; N), special figure 2
The number of abnormal fluctuations is set to the specified value -1 (step X391), and the initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is set in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer (step X392). Next, the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, the player strikes right despite the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3 in which it is recommended to strike left and proceed with the game mainly in the special figure 1 variable display game. In this case, the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and processing is performed to notify the player to make a left-handed strike.

On the other hand, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396). ). If the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the time is up (step X396; Y
) Prepares the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag (step X397) and prepares the special figure 2 abnormal change release command (step X398).

After that, it is determined whether the prepared flag is the same as the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X399). Then, when the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area are the same (step X399; Y), that is, when there is no change in the state,
Special figure 2 Ends the abnormal fluctuation monitoring process. Further, when the prepared flag and the value of the current special figure 2 abnormal change flag area are not the same (step X399; N), that is, when there is a change in the state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag. (Step X4)
00).

If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal change release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step). X402), the effect command setting process is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (
In step X400; Y), after clearing the number of abnormal fluctuations in FIG. 2 to 0 (step X401).
, Steps X402 and X403 are performed (step X403), and the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process is completed. By the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal change generation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the special figure 2 abnormal change is detected, and the special figure 2 abnormal change release command is sent to the effect control device 300 when the special figure 2 abnormal change is released. It is transmitted to 300, and the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification are set.

32 and 33 show an example of processing by the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation monitoring process accompanying the progress of the game. In the example shown in FIG. 32, the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 is 3 in the normal gaming state ST1.
Therefore, the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is 15. When the next special figure 1 variation display game is started from this state (t11), the number of changes in special figure 1 changes from 15 to 16. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is started (t12), the number of abnormal changes in special figure 2 changes from 3 to 4.

After that, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t1).
3, t14). Here, when the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 reaches the specified value of 18 (t14), Special Figure 2
The number of abnormal fluctuations is updated by -1 and changes from 4 to 3, and the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is cleared to 0. Similarly, every time the special figure 1 variation display game is started, the special figure 1 variation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 variation number reaches the specified value of 18 (t17), The number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is updated by -1 and changes from 3 to 2, and the number of fluctuations in Special Figure 1 is cleared to 0. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted every time the specified number (here, 18 times) of the special figure 1 variation display game is executed.

FIG. 33 shows a case where the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, the normal game state ST
In No. 1, the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is 3. When the special figure 2 variation display game is started from this state (t21), the number of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations is updated from 3 to 4. Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal variation number reaches the specified value of 5.

As a result, the special figure 2 abnormal change occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, the output of the external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred and the game machine error status signal to the device outside the game machine is started. It becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation with the management device of the game store. In addition, a special figure 2 abnormality change generation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Production control device 300
Then, based on the reception of this command, the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred is notified by display, voice, or the like. That is, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 form a response means for performing a predetermined response based on the abnormality determination number (special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation number) satisfying a predetermined condition (a specified value).

Further, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 reaches the specified value of 5, the time counting by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is started (t22), and the predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses (60 seconds in this case). t
23), special figure 2 clears the number of abnormal fluctuations to 0, and stops the output of external information and the game machine error status signal. Further, a special figure 2 abnormal change release command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred based on the reception of this command.

The number of abnormal fluctuations in Special Figure 2 is set to the specified value -1 (4 in this case) after reaching the specified value (5 in this case) and determining that the abnormal variation in Special Figure 2 has occurred. Therefore, if the special figure 2 variation display game is newly started before the elapse of the predetermined time, the special figure 2 variation number becomes the specified value, and the time counting of the predetermined time is newly started from that point. As a result, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed even though the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal variation has occurred is performed, the notification period is extended accordingly.

In this way, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the fact that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches the specified value (for example, 5), for example, the game ball unintentionally enters the game area on the right side. Therefore, when a prize is won in the second start winning opening 37, it is possible to prevent the special figure 2 from being immediately determined to be an abnormal change. Furthermore, by playing the special figure 1 variation display game a predetermined number of times, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is subtracted, so that the special figure 2 abnormal variation generated for the unintended winning of the second starting winning opening 37 The number will be resolved if the game is played after that, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake or the result of the game of another player from accumulating and being determined to be an abnormal variation in Special Figure 2.

It should be noted that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed and the specified value for the special figure 1 abnormal fluctuation number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted are arbitrary. It can be set.
Whatever the respective specified values set here are values that can prevent the player from aiming at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3. Any value is acceptable. If a power failure occurs and the system recovers, monitoring should be resumed from the state before the power failure. In addition, even when the special figure 2 abnormality change notification is performed, the prize balls are paid out as usual for the prize.

[Game machine status check process]
FIG. 34 shows a game machine state check process in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process (
Steps X310, X312, X315) are shown. In this game machine status check process,
First, the status monitoring table corresponding to the status scan counter is acquired (step X451).
, It is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

Information corresponding to the status scan counter is defined in the status monitoring table. This information includes, for example, a lower address of the start address of the state monitoring area, a lower address of the port input state area of the switch control area in which the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bit of the target signal, and a signal. On judgment data, status off command (in the case of an error system, an error notification end command is issued), status on command (in the case of an error system, an error notification start command is issued), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer Includes comparison values.

When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step X453), and the target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). After that, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X4).
55), the value of the target signal control region is compared with the state of the current signal (step X459).
When the target signal is not on (step X452: N), it is a state indicating that the error type signal is not an error (normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step X452: Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step X456), and the target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). After that, the target status on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal status (step X45).
9). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), it means that the error-type signal is an error (abnormal or invalid), and the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is a state showing.

When the value of the target signal control area and the state of the current signal match (step X459; Y)
That is, if the signal status has not changed, the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (
Step X462), it is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). Further, when the value of the target signal control area and the current signal state do not match (step X459; N), that is, when the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area (step X459; N). Step X460). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target status monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or higher than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X461). Step X463).

When the value of the target status monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N
) Ends the game machine status check process. When the value of the target status monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the status monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the comparison value -1 (step X464). The state flag is compared with the value of the target state flag area (step X465).

Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step X465; Y), the game machine state check process ends. If the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area do not match (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), the game machine state check process is completed. As a result, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 35 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first
It is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

When the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), the idle state flag is prepared as the state flag (step X472), and the off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 3) is prepared.
2ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X4).
74), set the on-determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) (step X475).
..

After that, it is determined whether the value in the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether there is a change of on or off (step X476), and if they are the same (step X476; Y), The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). Also,
If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state region (step X477), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X47).
8), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set on-determination monitoring timer comparison value or off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, whether the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step). X480). When the signal confirmation time has not been reached (step X4)
80; N) ends the payout busy signal check process. When the signal confirmation time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1, and the previously set on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value of -1 is obtained. (Step X4)
81), save the prepared status flag in the payout busy signal flag area (step X48).
2) Finish the payout busy signal check process.

By this process, the busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time,
Even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues for the signal confirmation time, and the influence of noise etc. is affected. It is difficult to receive.

Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and the state becomes indefinite until any signal state continues for the signal confirmation time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and the device recovers from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued to the payout control device 200 even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. The prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that the payout control device 200 is continuously output as a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and surely grasps that the payout process can be performed immediately before transmitting the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It is possible to prevent it from being damaged.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
The details of. As shown in FIG. 36, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, the start port 1 (first start winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X491), and the hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

If the starting opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the information with the starting opening winning is set based on the winning of the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the game is in the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state (step X494). ). Then, in the case of the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state (step X494; Y), the process proceeds to step X497. If it is not in the normal gaming state or the second specific gaming state (step X494; N), the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and the effect command setting process is performed (step X496).
). After that, a table for setting the hold information by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497).
), The special figure start port 1 switch process is performed (step X498).

Based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs right-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform a right-handed hit by display, voice, or the like. When it is other than the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, that is, the first specific game state ST
In 2 or in the special game state, right-handed is more advantageous for the player, and when a prize is detected at the first starting winning opening 36, which is designed so that the player does not win unless left-handed, the right-handed instruction is notified. I have to.

Next, the starting port 2 (second starting winning opening 37) winning monitoring table is prepared (step X499).
), A hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X500), and it is determined whether or not there is start opening winning information that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501).

If the start opening winning information is not set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, the information that there is no starting opening prize is set. On the other hand, when the start opening winning information is set based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether or not the player is in the first specific gaming state (step X502). Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state (step X5).
02; Y) shifts to step X507. Further, when it is not in the first specific gaming state (step X502; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit, that is, in the first special gaming state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit (step X503).

If the jackpot is in progress (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the jackpot is not hit (step X503; N), it is determined whether the first final fluctuation is in progress (step X504). The first final change means that the special figure change display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) after the first special game state is completed and the first specific game state is reached. Therefore, the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery was performed in the first specific game state is being executed.

If this first final fluctuation is in progress (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the first final change is not in progress (step X504; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X506).
). After that, a table for setting the hold information by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507).
), The special figure start port 2 switch process is performed (step X508), and the start port switch monitoring process is completed.

Based on receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs left-handed instruction notification instructing the player to perform left-handed by displaying, voice, or the like. In the case of the normal gaming state ST1 or the second specific gaming state ST3, left-handed is more advantageous for the player, and winning is detected at the second starting winning opening 37, which is designed to win only right-handed. In some cases, left-handed instruction notification is performed.

In the first special game state, the first special variable winning device 38 may be opened, so that the left-handed instruction notification is not performed. Further, in the special figure variation display game that is finally executed in the first specific game state, the probability state is changed to the low probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, so that the probability state is low during the game. Since the judgment is made in a high probability state, there is a high possibility that a special game state will occur, and since the first specific game state will be produced until the end of the game, the left-handed instruction notification should not be given. ing.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
FIG. 37 shows a hard random number acquisition process (step X) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process.
492, X500) was shown. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, information on no start opening prize is set (step X511), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (step X).
512).

If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. When the target switch has an input (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether or not the target random number latch register has latch data (step X514).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start opening winning information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is completed.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 38 shows a special figure start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 1 switch processing, first, the first start winning opening 3
The start port signal 1 output count, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings in 6 is output to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (step X521), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X522). ), Determine whether the number of outputs overflows (step X523)
). Then, when the number of outputs does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number). Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525.
Here, the number of outputs can be stored up to 255, but if the number of outputs is stored up to the upper limit, the value is not saved after the update because the loop is looped by +1 update and becomes 0.

When the number of special figure 1 hold is less than the upper limit value (4 in this case) (step X525; Y), the special figure 1 information setting flag used for sorting the fluctuation pattern in the special figure hold information determination process described later is set (step X525; Y). Step X526), update the number of special figures 1 held by +1 (step X527)
). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the reserved number of special figure 1 is calculated (step X528), and the jackpot random number prepared by the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is RW.
Save in the jackpot random number storage area of M (step X529).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Furthermore, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and R
It is saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of WM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, the special figure hold information determination process (step X), which is the look-ahead process,
534) is performed, the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step X535), the effect command setting process is performed (step X536), and the special figure start port 1 switch process is completed. .. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, and can store the predetermined random number as the first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. It serves as the first start storage means.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
FIG. 39 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the above-mentioned special figure start port 1 switch process. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state (step X541), and when it is in the first specific gaming state (step X541; Y).
) Ends the special figure reservation information determination process. Further, when it is not in the first specific gaming state (step X541; N), it is determined whether or not it is in the big hit, that is, in the first special gaming state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit (step X542).

If the jackpot is in progress (step X542; Y), the special figure reservation information determination process ends.
Further, when the jackpot is not in progress (step X542; N), the jackpot determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value (step X).
543). Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process for determining whether or not the jackpot is a small hit is performed depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the small hit determination value (step X544; N).
Step X547). Then, when the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), the stop symbol information of the small hit is set (step X549), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the out-of-order stop symbol information is set (step X550), and the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

After preparing the look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551),
The effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, the special figure 1 information setting process (step X553) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Process (step X554).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game is prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step X556), and end the special figure reservation information determination process. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are the processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal processing. Is similar to.

By the above processing, the look-ahead stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A look-ahead variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or a small hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is changed to the special figure 1 variation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. The effect control device 300 can be notified before the start timing of the display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It is possible to notify the player of the result-related information before the timing.

That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means. Make a possible first decision. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

Note that this special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Further, in the case of the first specific gaming state, the look-ahead processing is not performed. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is the main body in the first specific game state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly removed by deriving a special result in this special figure 2 variable display game. This is because it is almost always stopped as a result. In other words, since most of them are out of order, there is not much meaning in notifying the look-ahead result, and after notifying the look-ahead result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is forcibly changed to the out-of-look result. This is because there may be a contradiction.

However, since the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, it is special as long as there is a first start memory in the first period of the first specific gaming state. Fig. 1 There is a high possibility that only the variable display game will be played, and in such a case, the first
A look-ahead effect may be performed on the start memory. The first to perform such a look-ahead effect
Of the start memories, those that occurred before the start of the first specific game state are pre-reading, so the result is used, and those that occur after the start of the first specific game state are such pre-reading. Pre-reading processing is performed for the target of the production. Of course, the look-ahead process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect based on the result of the look-ahead process in another process.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 40 shows a special figure start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 2 switch processing, first, the second start winning opening 3
The start port signal 2 output number of times, which is the number of times the information regarding the number of times of winning a prize in 7 is output to the external management device of the game machine 10, is loaded (step X561), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X562). ), Determine whether the number of outputs overflows (step X563)
). Then, when the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal 2 output count area of the RWM (step X564), and the start port 2 (step X564) is saved.
Second start winning opening 37) It is determined whether or not the winning is invalid.

The start opening 2 winning invalidity means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small hit) is stopped (during processing during special figure display described later), during the first or second special game state, and Special Figure 2 The variable display game is being executed. When this starting port 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y)
Ends the special figure start port 2 switch processing. If the starting port 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the number of special figures 2 held is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the above-mentioned hard random number acquisition process is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

After that, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the small hit symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure start port 2 switch processing is completed. That is, the game control device 100
However, it serves as a start winning prize storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the second start winning opening 37. Since there are few types of fluctuation patterns in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is not used.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 41 shows a special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process.
showed that. Special Figure 1 Variable display Controls the entire process related to the game and sets the display of Special Figure 1.
In this special figure 1 game processing, first, during the big hit / small hit of special figure 2, that is, during the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. (Step Y101).

When the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is not in progress (step Y101; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, the game is updated by -1 (step Y103). ). In addition, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 2 is in progress (step Y1).
01; Y) shifts to step Y103.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 1 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 2 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). Special Figure 1 If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the process is branched to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The game sequence branch table referred to in FIG. 1 is set in the register (step Y105). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number is acquired (step Y106), and the subroutine call by the special figure 1 game processing number is performed (step Y107).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 1 variable display game are set. Figure 1
Setting information necessary to perform processing during fluctuations Special Figure 1 Normal processing (step Y108)
I do. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the special figure 1 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display processing, and the like. 1 Perform the variable processing (step Y109).

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "2" and the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type Set the fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening, set the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 1 Displaying processing (
Step Y110) is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y111). In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y112) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, a process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, or
Special figure 1 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y113) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y114) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Processing during small hit fanfare (step Y1) to set necessary information for
15) is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y116) for setting the ending command, setting the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit residual sphere processing (step Y117) for setting the information necessary for the processing is performed.
In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (
Step Y119), the symbol variation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed, and the special figure 1 game process is completed. This special figure 1 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control related to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 42 shows a special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. In the special figure 2 game process, control of the entire process related to the special figure 2 variable display game and setting of the display of the special figure 2 are performed. This special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process for the special figure 2.

In this special figure 2 game processing, first, during the big hit / small hit of special figure 1, that is, during the special gaming state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. (Step Y131). Then, when the big hit / small hit of the special figure 1 is not in progress (step Y131; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y13).
2) If the game processing timer in Special Figure 2 is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y133). Further, in the case of a big hit / small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y131; Y), step Y133
Move to.

In the large winning opening switch monitoring process, the game ball in the upper large winning opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the lower large winning opening switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39. Performs processing to monitor detection. In the special figure 2 game processing, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit, and the special figure 1 variable display is performed. Regarding the special game state executed based on the result of the game being a big hit or a small hit, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). Special Figure 2 If the value of the game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y152, and subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, is the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer 0? Is determined (step Y135).

When the number of repetitions of this special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N)
Updates the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer by -1 (step Y150), and special figure 2
The timer value for length variation (60,000 ms in this case) is saved in the game processing timer area (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

In order to prevent the player from intentionally executing the special figure 2 variable display game having a high probability of small hit in the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state The fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game in ST3 is set to be a very long time (for example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the fluctuation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the initial value of the timer. Therefore, the fluctuation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times the time is measured for the specified time (here, 60,000 ms).

Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (step Y135; Y),
The special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (step Y136). Then, using the table, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is acquired (step Y137).
), Make a subroutine call based on the special figure 2 game processing number (step Y138).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 variable display game is monitored, and the variable start setting and effect setting of the special figure 2 variable display game, and the special figure 2 variable display game are set. Figure 2
Special Figure 2 Normal processing (step Y139) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuations
I do. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the special figure 2 sets the stop display time, sets the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display processing, and the like. 2 Perform the variable processing (step Y140).

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and each big hit type Setting the fanfare time according to the opening pattern of the big winning opening, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, etc. Special Figure 2 Displaying processing (
Step Y141) is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the opening time of the large winning opening is set, the number of opening times is updated, and the information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is set. Perform fanfare / interval processing (step Y142). In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "4", the process of setting the interval command if the jackpot round is not the final round, while setting the ending command if it is the final round, or the big winning opening. The large winning opening opening processing (step Y143) for setting the information necessary for performing the remaining ball processing is performed.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, a process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged, or
Special figure 2 The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step Y144) for setting the information necessary for performing the big hit end processing is performed. In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 jackpot end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the opening time / opening pattern of the large winning opening when a small hit occurs, the fanfare command is set, and the small hit medium processing is performed. Processing during small hit fanfare (step Y1) to set the information required for
46). In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step Y147) for setting the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing is performed. Do.

In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", the process of setting the time for the remaining balls that have won in the large winning opening during the small hit medium processing and the small hit end. The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y148) for setting the information necessary for performing the processing is performed.
In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (
Step Y152), the symbol variation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure 2 game process is completed. This special figure 2 game process is a process for performing a series of execution control related to the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). The above special figure 2 game processing basically performs the same processing as the special figure 1 game processing described above for the special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game processing and the special figure 2 game processing. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel in.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 43 shows the big winning opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102, Y132) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). Then, when the upper prize opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. In addition, when the upper prize opening is not open (step Y161;
N) determines whether or not the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (step Y162). The remaining ball processing in this determination includes both the large winning opening remaining ball processing based on the big hit and the small hit remaining ball processing based on the small hit.

If the remaining balls of the upper prize opening are being processed (step Y162; Y), step Y166
Move to. In addition, when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is not in progress (step Y162; N),
It is determined whether the lower prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is open (step Y16).
3). Then, when the lower prize opening is not open (step Y163; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the lower prize opening is open (step Y163;
Y) determines whether or not there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164).

The opening in steps Y161 and Y163 means the opening in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the first special result (big hit), and the special gaming state based on the second special result (small hit). Includes both during opening in the second special gaming state. Also, step Y1
In the determination of 61 to Y163, the determination may be made by referring to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set may be set in this flag. It may be judged based on.

If there is no input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. In addition, when there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164;
Y) sets 1 in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process (step Y165), and proceeds to step Y175.

On the other hand, in step Y166, the transition to the case where the upper prize opening is open (step Y161; Y) or the case where the remaining ball processing of the upper prize opening is being processed (step Y162; Y) is performed.
0 is set in the winning counter (step Y166). After that, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the upper prize opening switch (step Y167), and if there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y175.

When there is an input to the upper prize opening switch (step Y167; Y), the grand prize opening count command is prepared (step Y168), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable winning device 38, a large winning opening count command is transmitted in order to produce an effect by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

After that, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is in progress (step Y177; Y). If any of the above, the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also,
The value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), and the remaining ball of the big winning opening is not being processed (step Y175; N).
If step Y176; N) and the small hit remaining ball processing is not in progress (step Y177; N), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of large winning openings (step Y178), and the number of large winning openings is the upper limit (1). (Step Y179), it is determined whether or not the number of game balls that can be won in the round of

When the number of large winning openings is not equal to or higher than the upper limit (9 in this case) (step Y17)
9; N) ends the large winning opening switch monitoring process. In addition, when the number of large winning openings exceeds the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0. (Step Y181
). Then, it is determined whether the opening in the big hit, that is, the opening in the first special gaming state which is the special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

If the jackpot is not open (step Y182; N), that is, if the jackpot is open, the jackpot switch monitoring process ends. If the jackpot is being opened (step Y182; Y), the value of the jackpot opening operation end is saved in the jackpot control pointer area (step Y183), and the jackpot switch monitoring process is terminated. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

It should be noted that even when there is an input to the lower prize opening switch (step Y164; Y), the grand prize opening count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, when there is a remaining ball processing for the lower prize opening, the large winning opening count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even when the lower major winning opening switch is input during the remaining ball processing. You can do it.

[Special figure 1 Normal processing]
FIG. 44 shows the special figure 1 normal process (step Y108) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 1 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 1 is not normally executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

If the special figure 1 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 normal processing is ended. Further, when the special figure 1 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been notified, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), step Y
Move to 206. If the left-handed instruction has not been notified (step Y202; N),
Prepare the left-handed instruction notification command (step Y203), and perform the effect command setting process (step Y203).
Step Y204). After that, the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and the left-handed instruction notification flag is set.
It is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is
It is designed to be cleared when the last special figure variation display game played in the first specific game state ends, and as a result, a left-handed instruction notification is performed when shifting to the normal game state. ..

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y206; Y), step Y217
Move to. Further, when the number of pending special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y206; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). , Perform the effect command setting process (step Y212). The process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y21).
At the time of performing 0), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the hold corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number -1 from the current special figure 1 hold number is performed. I'm preparing a few commands.

Next, the special figure 1 changing state is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y21).
2). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and is 0 to 5.
Is set. Special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, and special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. The special figure status 2 indicates a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, the special figure status 3 indicates a state in which both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed, and the special figure status 4 is the first special game state which is a special game state based on the jackpot. The special figure status 5 indicates that the game is in the second special game state, which is a special game state based on a small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y213). Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state (step Y213; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. Also,
When it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether or not the first final change is in progress (step Y214). The first final change means that the special figure change display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) after the first special game state is completed and the first specific game state is reached. Therefore, the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery was performed in the first specific game state is being executed.

If the first final fluctuation is in progress (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the first final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, the special figure 1 variation check flag is set when the special figure 1 variation display game is started in the normal game state or the second specific game state.
After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 normal process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 Normal processing]
FIG. 45 shows the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y139) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game processing. In this special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to fluctuate (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start the fluctuation is not between the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, which is a big hit or a small hit, and the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that although the fluctuation cannot be started even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, in that case, the special figure 2 is not normally executed. , It is not necessary to judge this here.

When the special figure 2 is not capable of starting fluctuation (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 normal processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 normal processing is ended. Further, when the special figure 2 is capable of starting fluctuation (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is 0 (step Y222). In addition, as mentioned above, special figure 2 hold (second
(Starting memory) is temporarily used to start the special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning when the second starting winning opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. It is not intended to hold the start of the special figure variation display game as in the first start memory.

Then, when the number of reserved special figures 2 is not 0 (step Y222; N), the fluctuation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process for setting the information related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and the special figure 2 changing is set (information addition) in the special figure status area (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y227). Then, in the case of the first specific gaming state (step Y227; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. Also,
When it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether or not the first final change is in progress (step Y228). The first final change means that the special figure change display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) after the first special game state is completed and the first specific game state is reached. Therefore, the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery was performed in the first specific game state is being executed.

If the first final fluctuation is in progress (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If the first final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y228; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 variation display game is started in the normal game state or the second specific game state.
After that, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 normal process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). Then, when the special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233), and when it has not been disclosed (step Y233; N), it is in the customer waiting state. Performs processing related to settings. Further, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is not 0 (step Y23).
1; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y) or when the customer waiting demo has been started (step Y233; Y), the process proceeds to step Y237.

In the process related to the setting of the customer waiting state, first, the customer waiting demo flag area is set (step Y234), the customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235), and the effect is produced. The command setting process is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By making the customer waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens according to the probability state.

Further, if the effect control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the effect control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses the game state information, so that an appropriate effect cannot be performed. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to perform an effect according to the game state from the reception of this command, and the probability information command based on the change in the game state is transmitted. You will be able to return to the production according to the game state faster than waiting.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, and it is conceivable that the probability state changes depending on the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, the fluctuation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure fluctuation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). As a result, the effect control device 30
At 0, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state.

In addition, by transmitting the fluctuation start probability information command each time the special figure fluctuation display game starts, even if the effect control device 300 is restarted, the effect according to the game state can be performed from the reception of this command. This makes it possible to return to the effect according to the game state faster than waiting for the probability information command based on the change in the game state to be transmitted. The customer waiting demo command and the fluctuation start probability information command may include other information for allowing the effect control device 300 to return to the effect according to the game state when the effect control device 300 is restarted.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
FIG. 46 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 normal process.
showed that. This special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game. First, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of alignment information. , The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (design information).
After performing 243), the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step Y245).

After that, in the special figure 1 variation display game, a variation pattern, which is a variation mode in the game, is set.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y246) is performed, and the variation start information setting process (step Y247) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. Then, after this, a process for adjusting so as not to cause an inconvenience between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed at the same time is performed.

The special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived, the other is forcibly removed regardless of the lottery result. As a result, it ends. In particular, since the special figure 2 variable display game is always a big hit or a small hit, if the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, such a process is performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, for example, even though the special figure 1 variable display game is producing a highly expected effect, the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, and the player feels distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game that is about to start, it is possible to take measures such as preventing a highly expected effect from being selected. I am trying to do it.

For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y248), and if it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of the first specific game state, the game is progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game.
In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and the game is executed frequently, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped as a result of disconnection. , Special Figure 1 In the variable display game, since it is set in advance so that the effect with high expectation is not selected, no special processing is performed here.

Further, when it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether or not the first final change is in progress (step Y249). The first final change means that the special figure change display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 100th time) after the first special game state is completed and the first specific game state is reached. Therefore, the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery was performed in the first specific game state is being executed.

If the first final fluctuation is in progress (step Y249; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. Since the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the first final fluctuation, will be stopped in a short time, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game to be started from now on will be forcibly stopped in a short time. Therefore, even if a highly expected effect is selected for the special figure 1 variable display game, it will end before the start of the effect. Therefore, here, a process for preventing the highly expected effect from being selected. Do not do.

Further, when the first final change is not in progress (step Y249; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in change (step Y250). When special figure 2 is not changing (step Y250; N
) Goes to step Y257. In this case, since it is in the normal game state or the second specific game state, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started from now on, the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game is a very long variable time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped, no processing is performed here to prevent a highly expected effect from being selected.

When the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). Special Figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254.
Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N).
Determines whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y2).
52).

Special figure 2 When the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y)
Goes to step Y257. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier. Therefore, in order to prevent the production with high expectation from being selected. No processing is performed.

Further, when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252).
In (N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is calculated (step Y253), and is the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game? Is determined (step Y254). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on is less than the remaining variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; Y)
Goes to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game ends earlier, no processing is performed to prevent a highly expected effect from being selected.

Further, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y254; N), it is notified that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer. A command is prepared (step Y255), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256). After that, the high-probability fluctuation number update process for managing the period of the high-probability state is performed (step Y257), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated. Production control device 30
At 0, based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is longer.
For the special figure 1 variable display game, processing such as restricting the selection of highly expected effects is performed.

When the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y254; N)
Information on the fluctuation pattern set in step Y246) (first and second half fluctuation pattern numbers, etc.)
May be performed to reset the effect so that the effect control device 300 does not select the effect with high expectation. In the process of resetting the fluctuation pattern,
The fluctuation time may not be changed, or may be changed. Further, the process of preparing the command for notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Y255) may or may not be performed.

That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern processing (step Y246) performed by the game control device 100.
) Indicates the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information of the second variation display game when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal gaming state. It serves as a first variation mode determining means capable of determining. Further, the process of resetting the above variation pattern performed by the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determining means, the second variation display game. Is being executed, the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation mode information of the second fluctuation display game is referred to, and information on the fluctuation pattern is obtained without changing the fluctuation time of the first fluctuation display game that has been determined. It serves as a second variation mode determining means that can be redetermined.

Further, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246)
When determining the fluctuation pattern in, it is determined whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y25).
4) may be performed to determine the fluctuation pattern according to the game situation from the beginning.

In addition, when the off-target result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result is special. FIG. 2 The process of determining whether or not the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game is less than the remaining fluctuation time (step Y254) is performed. Special Figure 2 If the result of the variable display game is out of order, Special Figure 1
This process is unnecessary because the variable display game is not forcibly stopped due to the disconnection result.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
FIG. 47 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 normal process.
showed that. This special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game. First, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of alignment information. , The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

Next, the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information).
After performing 263), the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and various various settings related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are performed. A special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referencing information is set, is prepared (step Y265).

After that, the special figure 2 which sets the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.
The variation pattern setting process (step Y266) is performed, and the variation start information setting process (step Y267) for setting the variation start information of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. By these processes, the result and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed are determined. After that, the high-probability fluctuation number update process for managing the period of the high-probability state is performed (step Y).
268), the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is completed.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 that can be executed at the same time
No processing is performed to make adjustments so that inconvenience does not occur between variable display games. is this,
This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, so that the special figure 2 variable display game is less likely to be forcibly ended with a missed result. However, as in the case of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped due to a loss result, the selection of a highly expected effect may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 48 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
242) was shown. In this big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared (step Y273) from the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM, and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0. The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y275), and when it is a jackpot (step Y275; Y).
) Goes to step Y279. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y276) is a jackpot (step Y277; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y279) for determining the above is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is a small hit (step Y280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y271. (Step Y281), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not a small hit (step Y280; N), the large hit flag 1 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 49 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
262) was shown. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area of RWM (step Y293), and the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area is cleared to 0.

After that, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 1 which is the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a jackpot (step Y295), and when it is a jackpot (step Y295; Y).
) Goes to step Y299. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits. If it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random value is a big hit depending on whether or not it matches the big hit determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step Y296) is a jackpot (step Y297; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), whether or not the acquired big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether or not it matches the small hit determination value. The small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.

Then, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291. (Step Y301), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the large hit flag 2 setting process ends. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 50 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps Y276, Y296) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process and the jackpot flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot judgment process, first
The lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, when it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery of the big hit was lost. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312).
N) determines whether the state is in a high probability state (step Y313).

Then, in the case of the high probability state (step Y313; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If the probability is not high (step Y313; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ..

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a jackpot, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y317), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. Also, when the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316).
N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as a determination result (step Y31).
8), the jackpot determination process is completed.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 51 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279, Y299) in the above-mentioned big hit flag 1 setting process and big hit flag 2 setting process. In this small hit judgment process, first
It is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). A small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or more than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Moreover, the big hit judgment value and the small hit judgment value do not overlap.

When the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y),
That is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process ends. In addition, the loss as a judgment result indicates that the lottery for small hits has been missed. When the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set, that is, whether the determination is for the special figure 1 variable display game. (Step Y322).

Then, when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). Also, when the information in Special Figure 1 is not being set (
In the case of step Y322; N), that is, the determination regarding the special figure 2 variable display game,
A small hit upper limit determination value for special figure 2 is set (step Y324), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 52 shows a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
243) is shown. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331), and if it is a big hit (step Y331; Y), the special figure 1
Load the jackpot symbol random number from the jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y3)
32). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y333).
Step Y334). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y335).
Step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 1 display 51).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 1
Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y338). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and when it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol Load the small hit symbol random number from the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) (step Y)
340). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and the decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y).
346).

If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the missed stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 1. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y345), and prepare the decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y346). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 1 command is saved in the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y347).
), The effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decorative special figure 1 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350), and the special figure The 1 small hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 53 shows a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
263) was shown. The special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step Y361), and when it is a jackpot (step Y).
361; Y) loads the jackpot symbol random number from the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y364). The jackpot type is selected by this process. It should be noted that the stop symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 2 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result will be forcibly removed.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y365).
Step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is a special figure display (here, special figure 2 display 52).
This is for setting the stop symbol at the display device 41 and the stop symbol at the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area (step Y367), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. Special figure 2
Save in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y368). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369), and when it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol The small hit symbol random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, the special figure 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y3).
72). The small hit type is selected by this process. After that, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373).
A decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol save area (step Y374), and the missed stop symbol pattern is stopped in special figure 2. Save in the symbol pattern area (step Y375), and prepare the decorative special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y376). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure 2 command is saved in the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y377).
), The effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decorative special figure 2 command is later transmitted to the effect control device 300. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is completed.

[Special Figure 1 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 54 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y24) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process.
4) was shown. In this special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y401). When not in the first specific gaming state (step Y401; N), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step). Y403)
, It is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is the big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

In the case of a special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412.
If it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y404; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y40).
5). Then, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is out of order, the process proceeds to step Y407. In addition, when it is a special figure 1 small hit (step Y4)
05; Y) updates the value by adding the special figure 1 hold number to the latter half offset data (step Y).
406), add the special figure 1 hold number to the first half offset data and convert the value (step Y4).
07), the process proceeds to step Y412.

On the other hand, in the case of the first specific gaming state (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y408). And when it is not a special figure 1 big hit (step Y40)
In 8; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 missed / small hit in the first specific gaming state is set (step Y409), and the second half offset data for the special figure 1 length variation is set (step Y411). Further, in the case of the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for the special figure 1 big hit in the first specific game state is set (step Y410), and the second half offset data for the special figure 1 length variation is set. Is set (step Y411).

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413), and the special figure 1 information End the setting process.

That is, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the normal game state and the second specific game state, in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation pattern considering the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is determined for both the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined only in the first half fluctuation pattern in consideration of the number of reservations in Special Figure 1, and in the case of a big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the number of reservations in Special Figure 1. To. Further, in the special figure 1 variation display game in the first specific game state, the variation pattern is determined without considering the number of reservations in the special figure 1.

[Special Figure 2 Information Setting Process]
FIG. 55 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y26) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process.
4) was shown. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y421). In the case of the first specific gaming state (step Y421; Y), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y421). Step Y423)
, Step Y428.

On the other hand, when it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). And when it is not a special figure 2 big hit (step Y42)
In 4; N), the first half offset data for the special figure 2 loss / small hit in the normal game state and the second specific game state is set (step Y425), and the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation is set (step Y425). Step Y427). In addition, when it is a special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y)
Sets the first half offset data for the special figure 2 jackpot in the normal game state and the second specific game state (step Y426), and sets the second half offset data for the special figure 2 length variation (step Y427).

Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429), and the special figure 2 information End the setting process.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 56 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

In this special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). , Special figure 1 fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (
The variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from (for the number of hold 1) (step Y453).

Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is off, that is, the stop symbol pattern is the off-stop symbol pattern (step Y454), and when the special figure 1 is off (step Y454; Y), 2
The byte distribution process is performed (step Y455), and the process proceeds to step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not out of alignment (step Y454; N), the sorting process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. If the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but if the result is off, the distribution value is 2 to enable various effects.
It is a part-time job.

Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of the special figure 1. And prepare (step Y458). Then, the distribution process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y461), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (
Step Y463), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the special figure 1 (step Y464).

After that, the distribution process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be started is set.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process]
FIG. 57 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 2 variation pattern setting process, first, the latter half variation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half variation selection table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). , The variation pattern random number 2 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area of the special figure 2 (step Y473).

Next, the distribution process is performed (step Y474), the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step Y475). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Then, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step Y476), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the second half fluctuation number determined as the fluctuation distribution information 1 (step Y477).
Next, obtain and prepare the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer (
Step Y478), the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded and prepared from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of the special figure 2 (step Y479).

After that, the distribution process (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern for the entire period of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be started is set. Since there are few types of latter half fluctuations in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the latter half fluctuation group is not selected by the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 58 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step Y455) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the prepared second-half variable group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table, since there is no need for distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y502; Y).
Step Y507), the 2-byte distribution process is completed. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step Y502; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step Y5).
03).

Next, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random number value is calculated. Is less than "0" (step Y505). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process shifts to step Y503, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do. That is, in step Y503, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step Y505 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance. Calculate the numerical value (step Y504). And
It is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505).

In step Y505, the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y).
505; Y) is determined. As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table. Then, in step Y505, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 59 shows the distribution processing (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and special figure 2 variation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) is selected based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

In this sorting process, first, the first data of the prepared second half variable selection table (selection table) and the first half variable selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, "
It is checked whether or not it is 0 ") (step Y511). Here, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the latter half fluctuation group table, but distribution is necessary. In the case of a selection table without a distribution value, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step Y512; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step Y517), and the distribution is performed. End the process. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the latter half variable selection table or the first half variable selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable selection table or the first half variable selection table (Step Y513).

Next, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y513 from the loaded random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) to calculate a new random number value (step Y514), the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step Y515;
In N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process shifts to step Y513, and the subsequent processes are performed.

That is, in step Y513, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random number value. , Further calculate a new random number value (step Y514)
.. Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y).
515).

In step Y515, the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y).
515; Y) is determined. As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation number and the first half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern and the first half fluctuation pattern defined in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table. Then, in step Y515,
If it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step Y515; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result is updated (step Y517), and the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 60 shows the fluctuation start information setting processing (steps Y247, Y267) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this fluctuation start information setting process, first, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551), and when the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), the special figure 1 is set. The random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the special figure 2 are cleared (step). Y553).

Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step Y558).
), The added value is saved in the target special figure game processing timer area (step Y559).

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state and the second specific gaming state is out of alignment or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-mentioned added value, the remaining time (time less than 60,000 ms) excluding the time that can be measured by using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times that the specified time (here, 60,000 ms) is measured, is calculated as the added value. It is supposed to be done.

After that, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560), and if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step Y560; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether the long variation of the special figure 2 has started (step Y561). The long variation is a variation pattern set when the result is out of alignment or a small hit in the normal game state and the second specific gaming state in the special figure 2 variation display game, and is determined by the set variation pattern number. ..

Then, when it is not the start of the long variation of the special figure 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repetition count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the step Y564 is performed.
Move to. Further, when the long variation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

After that, a variable command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variable number is prepared (step Y564).
, The variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the latter half variation number is prepared (step Y565), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). Next, it is determined whether the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567), and when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y567; N).
Ends the fluctuation start information setting process. When the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figures 1 is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569). ), Clear the free area after the shift (step Y570), and end the fluctuation start information setting process.

By the above processing, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is,
Based on the first start memory stored in the first start storage means, the game control device 100 starts the first variation display game by transmitting the result and the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). It is the first decision-making tool that can be decided before. In addition, the game control device 100
A predetermined random number is extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37, and the result and the variation mode information of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) are obtained based on the predetermined random number. It serves as a second determination means that can be determined before the start of the variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where the game ball fired on one side of the game area 32 can win, and the second starting winning opening 37 fires on the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and is in a normal state (normal game state). The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination means is larger than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination means. It will be a long time.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Decorative special figure variable display Set the detailed production contents in the game. Information on the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holds), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol, and a variation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that include information about patterns. By transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the first variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variable display game from the whole of the special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. .. Further, it can be said that the second variable display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variable display game from the whole of the special figure 2 game processing.

Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination means and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination means. As a transmission means capable of transmitting to the effect control means (effect control device 300). Further, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the fluctuation time for each of the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game according to the start of the fluctuation display game, and the measurement time elapses. It serves as a measurement means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

If the result of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal gaming state and the second specific gaming state is out of order or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, The information about the fluctuation time may not be transmitted to the effect control device 300, but a command indicating only the long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of long fluctuation, it is sufficient to simply perform the fluctuation display, and it is not necessary to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command of long variation. The fluctuation time is managed only by the game control device 100, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 based on the end of the fluctuation time, and the effect control device 300 stops the variation display based on receiving the stop command. To do so. In this way, the burden of control on the effect control device 300 can be reduced.

[High probability fluctuation frequency update process]
FIG. 61 shows the high-probability fluctuation number update processing (steps Y257 and Y268) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start processing and special drawing 2 fluctuation start processing. In this high-probability fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability is high (step Y581), and if it is not in the high probability (step Y581; N), the high-probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. Also, if there is a high probability (
Step Y581; Y) updates the number of high-probability fluctuations for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high-probability state by -1 (step Y582), and determines whether the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y581). Step Y583).

When the high probability fluctuation number is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, when the high probability state continues, the high probability change number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when the high-probability state is terminated, the signal relating to the high-probability state and the end of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to be turned off. Further, the signal relating to the high probability state and the end of the time saving is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal is set to OFF.

Further, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability, no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y58).
7). Then, the final fluctuation flag corresponding to the symbol that starts to fluctuate and the gaming state that ends (first specific gaming state or second specific gaming state) is set (step Y588), and the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step). Y589), the high probability fluctuation number update process is terminated. In addition to this processing, the information in the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared when the result is a big hit in the special figure 1 display process and the special figure 2 display process, or when the power of the game machine is turned on. Become.

In the game machine of the present embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the end of the special game state, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display are set. Since the games can be executed at the same time, the high-probability variation number update process for managing the number of high-probability states is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game. If the game machine does not execute the other special figure variation display game while the other special figure variation display game is being executed as in the conventional case, the probability state is set by the end of the special figure variation display game for the predetermined number of times. If you change to the low probability state, no problem will occur. However, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time as in the game machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is set to a low probability at the end of the predetermined number of special figure variable display games. If it is changed to the state, the judgment is made in a high probability state even for the other special figure variation display game started during the execution of the one special figure variation display game, and the high probability is made over a predetermined number of times. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed at the same time as in the game machine of the present embodiment, one of the special figure variable display games, which is a predetermined number of times, is played in a high probability state. After the judgment, it is necessary to set the low probability state by the start of the other special figure variation display game. Here, immediately after the processing at the start of one special figure variation display game, which is the predetermined number of times, is completed. It is possible to change to a low probability state.

Since the high-probability fluctuation number update process is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the change of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed for the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state. It is already in a low probability state during display. Therefore, if another process refers to the actual probability state during the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the process is performed assuming that the probability state is low, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the final fluctuation flag is set so that the special figure fluctuation display game can be treated as a game being executed as a high probability state. Also, the final fluctuation flag is
Whether it is the last special figure variable display game in which the lottery was performed in the first specific game state or the second specific game state, or whether it is the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game. Contains information that can be used to determine. In the present embodiment, the final fluctuation flag for the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the first specific game state is referred to as the first final fluctuation flag.
The final variation flag for the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the second specific game state is referred to as the second final variation flag.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during change Transition setting processing]
FIG. 62 shows a special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y21) in the special figure 1 normal process.
6) was shown. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the blinking control timer (special figure 1) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area.
The initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of the display 51) is set (step Y606). Further, the initial value is set in the symbol number area during special figure 1 change (step Y60).
7), Special figure 1 Ends the process transition setting process during fluctuation.

Special figure 1 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation Transition setting processing]
FIG. 63 shows a special figure 2 change processing transition setting process (step Y23) in the special figure 2 normal process.
0) was shown. In the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the blinking control timer (special figure 2) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area.
An initial value (for example, 100 ms) of the blinking cycle timer of the display 52) is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the symbol number area during special figure 2 change (step Y61).
7), Special figure 2 Ends the process transition setting process during fluctuation.

Special figure 2 The initial value set in the symbol number area during fluctuation is 0, so that the fluctuation display is started from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit in the state where the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variation display has started by starting the variation display from the state where all the segments are turned off.

It should be noted that when the variable display is started on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is assumed that all the segments are turned off, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variation display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variation display is started from at least the state in which the segment is lit. You may try to do it. In addition, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is lit each time. In addition, special figure 1
The lighting mode when the display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 start to fluctuate may be the same or different.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 64 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 1 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y622), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y623).

Next, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). Since the gaming machine of the present embodiment may be forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the fluctuation is stopped. ..

After that, it is determined whether it is the final change of the first specific gaming state (step Y626). When the special figure 1 variation display game is the final variation of the first specific gaming state, the first final variation flag of the special figure 1 is set. Then, when it is not the final change of the first specific gaming state (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627).
, Step Y629. Further, in the case of the final change of the first specific gaming state (step Y626; Y), the display time at the time of the final change is set (step Y628), and step Y
Move to 629. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 variation display game set here is 600 ms in the case of a loss if it is not the final variation of the first specific game state.
The display time is set to 2000 ms for a big hit and 136 ms for a small hit. Further, in the case of the final change of the first specific gaming state, the display time of 7000 ms is set regardless of the result.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 1 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y629). When the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y629; Y)
Goes to step Y644. In addition, when the special figure 1 is not out of place (step Y629;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not being executed (step Y630; N), the process proceeds to step Y640. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y).
630; Y) determines whether or not special drawing 2 is being displayed during processing (step Y631). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 2 is in progress (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. If the special figure 2 is not being processed during display (step Y631; N), the number of times the symbol is fixed is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the display time of the special figure 1 set above as the display time of the special figure 2 is set. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display times of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 end at the same time. Even if the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and a new display time is started.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), the command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y635), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y636). ). After that, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 1 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y640), and whether the special figure 1 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). In the case of a special figure 1 small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. Also, if it is not a special figure 1 small hit (
Step Y641; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, load information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642), and special figure 1 big winning opening opening information. Information is loaded from the area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y643).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645).
, Special figure 1 Displaying process ends.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
FIG. 65 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
showed that. In this special figure 2 changing process, first, the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step Y653).

Next, the decorative special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). After that, it is determined whether it is the final change of the first specific gaming state (step Y656). When the special figure 2 variation display game is the final variation of the first specific gaming state, the first final variation flag of the special figure 2 is set.

Then, when it is not the final change of the first specific game state (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. Further, in the case of the final change of the first specific gaming state (step Y656; Y), the display time at the time of the final change is set (step Y658), and the process proceeds to step Y659. In addition, it should be noted
The display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 variation display game set here is 600 ms regardless of the result if it is not the final variation of the first specific gaming state, and if it is the final variation of the first specific gaming state. Is set to a display time of 7000 ms regardless of the result.

After that, it is determined whether the special figure 2 is out of alignment, that is, whether the result of the special drawing 2 variation display game is out of alignment (step Y659). When the special figure 2 is off (step Y659; Y)
Goes to step Y674. In addition, when the special figure 2 is not out of place (step Y659;
N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is running can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

Then, when the special figure 1 variation display game is not being executed (step Y660; N), the process proceeds to step Y670. In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y).
660; Y) determines whether or not processing is being performed while the special figure 1 is being displayed (step Y661). That is, in this case, based on the special figure 2 variable display game having a special result, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

If the process during display of special figure 1 is in progress (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. Further, when the special figure 1 display is not being processed (step Y661; N), the number of times the symbol is confirmed is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), the command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 1 command area (step Y665), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y666). ). After that, the decorative special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

Then, the command is loaded from the decorative special figure 2 command area and saved in the hit symbol command area (step Y670), and whether the special figure 2 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). In the case of a special figure 2 small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. Also, if it is not a special figure 2 small hit (
Step Y671; N), that is, in the case of a big hit, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672), and the special figure 2 big winning opening opening information Information is loaded from the area and saved in the large winning opening opening information area (step Y673).

After that, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol save area, saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675).
, Special figure 2 Displaying process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 66 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), Special figure 1 Ends the process transition setting process 1 during change.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 1]
FIG. 67 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuations Transition setting processing 1 is terminated.

[Special Figure 1 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 changing process. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 51 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 1 (step Y704).

Up to this point, the process is the same as that of the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and the information for obtaining the loss result is set below. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

Next, the special figure 1 large winning opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), and the small hit flag 1
The deviation information is saved in the area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step Y709). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y710), and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y7).
11), special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Displaying Process Transition Setting Process 2]
FIG. 69 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 changing process. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, the special figure 2 game process number “2” related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

Next, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the display 52 is saved in the fluctuation control flag area of FIG. 2 (step Y724).

Up to this point, the process is the same as that of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and the information for obtaining the loss result is set below. First, the stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

Next, clear the special figure 2 large winning opening opening information area (step Y727), and the small hit flag 2
The deviation information is saved in the area (step Y728), and the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step Y729). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area is cleared (step Y730), and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y7).
31), Special Figure 2 Displaying process Transition setting process 2 is terminated.

By the above processing of FIGS. 64 to 69, when one special figure variation display game has a special result, the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the first end control process is performed in which the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a disengagement result, and the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. Based on this, the second end control process is performed in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of disconnection.

From the above, the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variable display game when the execution control of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is performed. When the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) whose execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variable display game that performs the execution control. Can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variable display game execution control means is executed by the first variable display game execution control means when the execution control of the second variable display game is performed. When the first variable display game for which control is performed has a special result, the second variable display game for which execution control is performed can be terminated as a result other than the special result. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variable display game, the other variable display game can be forcibly stopped with the off result, so that no problem occurs even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed. Can be.

[Processing during display of special figure 1]
70 and 71 show the process during display of the special figure 1 in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process (step Y).
110) was shown. In this special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (
Step Y751), the small hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y752).

Next, the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 area is loaded in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y753), and the jackpot flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, the special figure 1 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is big hit information (step Y755), and if it is not a big hit (step Y).
755; N) proceeds to step Y777. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y7)
55; Y) is a test signal (for example, turning on the condition device operating signal, turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, turning on the special symbol 1) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the special figure 1 variable display game.
The hit signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y757), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y759), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (12, 5 or 2 in the case of this embodiment).
Is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y760). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the hit symbol command area (step Y762), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y7).
63). After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the case of this embodiment
In step Y766, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information
Is set (step Y767), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). Then, the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step Y769), and the upper prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y7).
70), the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y771). Furthermore, clear the area of the number of illegal prizes in the lower prize opening (step Y772),
Save the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the lower prize opening (step Y7)
73), the process proceeds to step Y774.

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y774), and the game is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y775). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y755, when the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N),
That is, when the big hit flag 1 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 1 is the small hit (small hit information) (step Y777). Then, when the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the final variation (step Y778).
). The final variation here includes both the first final variation and the second final variation. That is, the first
A predetermined number of times (here, 1) after the special game state ends and the first or second specific game state is reached.
The special figure variation display game (00th time) is being executed (including the stop time), and the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery was performed in the first or second specific game state is being executed. This is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery was held in a high probability state.

If it is not the final variation (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. Further, in the case of the final variation (step Y778; Y), the probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y780). And
Save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area when the power is restored (step Y78).
1), clear the left-handed instruction notification flag and the final fluctuation flag (step Y782). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, the left-handed instruction notification command is set in the next special figure 1 normal processing, and the left-handed instruction notification is performed. The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final fluctuation, but it may also be performed in the case of the second final fluctuation.

After that, the command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y783).
, The effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y78).
6), it is determined whether it is the first specific gaming state (step Y787).

When it is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y787; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, in the case of the first specific gaming state (step Y787; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y792), and if it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y792; Y).
Clears the upper prize opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y793), saves the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-period flag in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and steps Y7.
Move to 97. Also, if it is not a small hit that opens the upper prize opening (step Y792; N)
), That is, in the case of a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39)
Clear the lower prize opening fraudulent prize number area (step Y795), save the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and step Y797.
Move to. Then, special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y79)
7) is performed, and the process of displaying Special Figure 1 is completed.

Further, when it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is determined whether or not it is the final variation (step Y798). The final variation here also includes both the first final variation and the second final variation. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state.

If it is not the final variation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. Further, in the case of the final variation (step Y798; Y), the probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y800). And
Save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area when the power is restored (step Y80).
1), clear the left-handed instruction notification flag and the final fluctuation flag (step Y802). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final fluctuation, but it may also be performed in the case of the second final fluctuation.

Next, during the small hit of Special Figure 2, that is, the second based on the small hit that occurred in the special figure 2 variable display game.
It is determined whether or not the player is in the special gaming state (step Y803). If the small hit in FIG. 2 is in progress (step Y803; Y), the process proceeds to step Y806. As a result, the state of instructing right-handed strike is maintained. If the small hit in Special Figure 2 is not in progress (step Y803; N),
The signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y804), and the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y805). After that, the special figure 1 changing state in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806), the special figure 1 normal processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 display processing is terminated. ..

[Processing during display of special figure 2]
72 and 73 show the process during display of the special figure 2 in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process (step Y).
141) was shown. It should be noted that this special figure 2 display process is the same process as the special figure 1 display process described above for the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is loaded. Clear two areas (step Y812).

Next, the jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 area is loaded (step Y813) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, and the jackpot flag 2 region is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is big hit information (step Y815), and if it is not a big hit (step Y).
815; N) proceeds to step Y837. Also, if it is a big hit (step Y8)
15; Y) is a test signal (for example, turning on the condition device operating signal, turning on the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, turning on the special symbol 2) regarding the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game.
The hit signal is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

Then, the special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation release command is prepared (step Y817), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal change notification is terminated with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. After that, the round number upper limit value table is set (step Y819), and the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information (12, 5 or 2 in the case of this embodiment).
Is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area (step Y820). Further, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

Next, the decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y8).
23). After that, the fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

Next, the signal corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability of becoming a big hit in the special figure variation display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the case of this embodiment
In step Y826, two big hit signals and three big hit signals are saved as signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 100 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information
Is set (step Y827), and the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). Then, the probability variation operation area passage information area is cleared (step Y829), and the upper prize opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y8).
30), the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y831). Furthermore, clear the area of the number of illegal prizes in the lower prize opening (step Y832),
Save the flag outside the fraudulent monitoring period in the fraudulent monitoring period flag area of the lower prize opening (step Y8)
33), the process proceeds to step Y834.

Next, 3 is set as the processing number (step Y834), and the game is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y835). Further, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in step Y815, when the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y815; N),
That is, when the big hit flag 2 is the missed information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is the small hit (small hit information) (step Y837). Then, when the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether or not it is the final variation (step Y838).
). The final variation here includes both the first final variation and the second final variation. That is, the first
A predetermined number of times (here, 1) after the special game state ends and the first or second specific game state is reached.
The special figure variation display game (00th time) is being executed (including the stop time), and the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery was performed in the first or second specific game state is being executed. This is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery was held in a high probability state.

If it is not the final variation (step Y838; N), the process proceeds to step Y843. Further, in the case of the final variation (step Y838; Y), the probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y840). And
Save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area when the power is restored (step Y84).
1), clear the left-handed instruction notification flag and the final fluctuation flag (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, the left-handed instruction notification command is set in the next special figure 1 normal processing, and the left-handed instruction notification is performed. The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final fluctuation, but it may also be performed in the case of the second final fluctuation.

After that, the command is loaded from the hit symbol command area and prepared (step Y843).
, The effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y84).
6), it is determined whether it is the first specific gaming state (step Y847).

When not in the first specific gaming state (step Y847; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be turned off. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned off, and a display instructing left-handed strike is displayed.

On the other hand, in the case of the first specific gaming state (step Y847; Y), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game status display unit 77 is turned on, and a display instructing right-handed strike is made.

After that, it is determined whether it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y852), and if it is a small hit that opens the upper large winning opening (step Y852; Y).
Clears the upper prize opening fraudulent winning number area (step Y853), saves the fraudulent monitoring period out-of-period flag in the upper grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and steps Y8.
Move to 57. In addition, when it is not a small hit that opens the upper prize opening (step Y852; N)
), That is, in the case of a small hit that opens the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39)
Clear the lower prize opening fraudulent prize number area (step Y855), save the fraud monitoring period out-of-period flag in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and step Y857.
Move to. Then, special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing (step Y85)
7) is performed, and the process of displaying Special Figure 2 is completed.

If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is determined whether it is the final variation (step Y858). The final variation here also includes both the first final variation and the second final variation. That is, it is determined whether or not it is the last special figure variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state. Then, if it is not the final fluctuation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. Further, in the case of the final variation (step Y858; Y), the probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y861), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the final fluctuation flag are cleared (step Y862). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared only in the case of the first final fluctuation, but it may also be performed in the case of the second final fluctuation.

Next, during the small hit of Special Figure 1, that is, the second based on the small hit that occurred in the special figure 1 variable display game.
It is determined whether or not the player is in the special gaming state (step Y863). If the small hit in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y863; Y), the process proceeds to step Y866. As a result, the state of instructing right-handed strike is maintained. In addition, when it is not in the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y863; N),
The signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y865). After that, the special figure 2 in the special figure status area is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866), the special figure 2 normal processing transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. ..

That is, the first special game in which the game control device 100 generates the first special game state in which the special variation winning device is opened with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variation display game has the first special result. A second special game generating means for generating a second special gaming state in which the special variable winning device is opened without operating the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has the second special result while forming the generating means. Make.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 74 shows the fanfare in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display processing and special figure 2 display processing.
Details of the process transition setting process during the interval (steps Y776, Y836) will be described. In this fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing, first, the signal related to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y8).
71). Here, one big hit signal output by a big hit or a small hit is set to ON. Next, the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is O.
FF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal OFF,
Special symbol 2 Set the fluctuation time shortening status signal to OFF.

After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874), and the special figure game mode The special figure low probability, no time saving flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state is displayed. Clear the high-probability fluctuation frequency region for managing the number of games (step Y877). As a result, the high-probability state and the time-saving state are terminated, and the low-probability state and the normal state are set.

Next, the jackpot information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the final fluctuation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Either the first final fluctuation flag or the second final fluctuation flag is set in the final fluctuation flag area, and it is cleared regardless of which is set. Further, the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
880), save the number in the right-handed state in the game state display number 2 area (step Y88).
1).

After that, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal change flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal change number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormality change notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting process is completed. That is, with the occurrence of the big hit, all the information related to the abnormal change in Special Figure 2 is cleared.

[Special figure 1 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 75 shows a special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y797) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 display process. In this special figure 1 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal that is output as a big hit or a small hit is O.
Set to N. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure 1
Ends the process transition setting process during small hit fanfare.

[Special figure 2 Small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 76 shows a special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step Y857) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 display process. In this special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting process, first, "7" related to the small hit fanfare middle processing is set as the processing number (step Y901), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y902).

Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal that is output as a big hit or a small hit is O.
Set to N. Further, the signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

After that, the small hit medium information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2
Ends the process transition setting process during small hit fanfare.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
FIG. 77 shows the fanfare / in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing.
Processing during the interval (steps Y111, Y142) is shown. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step Y95).
1) Prepare the round command corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the number of rounds (step Y)
952), the effect command setting process is performed (step Y953).

Next, the jackpot processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the jackpot opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the jackpot processing control pointer area (step Y955). The initial value of the processing control pointer during the jackpot is set to 0 when opening and closing are repeated in one round. Here, the upper V opening corresponds. Further, in the case of performing one continuous opening in one round, the jackpot operation end value of 2 is set. The initial value may be set to a value other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

Then, the large winning opening opening information and the large winning opening opening time corresponding to the number of rounds are set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the processing number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, either 200 ms or 25000 ms.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958), and if it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y959). ), The opening time of the big winning opening is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y958; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y961), and the big winning opening opening time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area. (Step Y962).

Then, it is determined whether the round is for opening the upper prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y963). In the case of a round with the opening of the upper prize opening (step Y963; Y)
Performs the process transition setting process 1 while the large winning opening is open (step Y964), and the fanfare /
Ends processing during the interval. If it is not a round of opening the upper prize opening (step Y963; N), the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the upper prize opening is performed (step Y965), and the fanfare / interval processing is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 1]
FIG. 78 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step Y964) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. This big winning opening opening process Transition setting process 1
First, the signal relating to the opening start of the upper prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. Clear the number of large winning openings (step Y973)

Next, it is determined whether the lever solenoid is in the operation round (step Y974). The lever solenoid operation round is a lever member 38i that operates the lever solenoid 38f.
In the case of this embodiment, it is only a specific round of the first round. In the case of the lever solenoid operation round (step Y974; Y), the operation data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y975), and the large winning opening opening processing transition setting processing 1
To finish. As a result, data is set in the lever solenoid control pointer area, and the lever solenoid control timer is cleared. If it is not the lever solenoid operation round (step Y974; N), the stop data of the lever solenoid is set (step Y976), and the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening is completed. In this case, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened, but the lever solenoid 38f does not operate. In this embodiment, the first special variable winning device 38 is not opened except for the lever solenoid operation round, so this process is not performed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 2]
FIG. 79 shows the process transition setting process 2 (step Y965) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. This big winning opening processing while opening processing transition setting processing 2
First, the signal relating to the opening start of the lower prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the lower special winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winnings to the large winning opening is counted. The number of large winning openings is cleared (step Y983), and the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning openings is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
FIG. 80 shows the processing during opening of the large winning opening (steps Y112 and Y143) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the processing control pointer during the big hit is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether the loaded value is equal to or higher than the jackpot operation end value (here, 2) (step Y1002).

When the loaded value is not greater than or equal to the jackpot operation end value (2 in this case) (step Y1002)
In (N), the jackpot operation transition setting process is performed (step Y1003), the jackpot operation control pointer is updated by +1 (step Y1004), and the process during the opening of the jackpot is completed. In this case, opening and closing is performed during one round, and the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated jackpot processing control pointer.

On the other hand, when the loaded value is equal to or greater than the jackpot operation end value (here, 2) (step Y1).
002; Y) compares the current number of rounds in the running special gaming state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value region to determine whether the current round is the final round ((Y).
Step Y1005). Then, if it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006).
), The effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. Further, in the case of the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is prepared. I do.

Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is set (step Y1009), and
As the processing number, 5 related to the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is set (step Y1010). The remaining sphere processing time is set to 1300 ms or 1700 ms. Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1011).

In the case of a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1011; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1).
014), the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y10).
15).

After that, the off-data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1).
016), the process of opening the large winning opening is completed. In step Y1016, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for each of the winning openings.

[Big hit operation transition setting process]
FIG. 81 shows the jackpot operation transition setting process (step Y) in the above-mentioned process during opening of the jackpot.
1004) is shown. In this jackpot operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the jackpot operation control pointer is even or odd (step Y1021). In addition, 0 here
Branch processing is performed assuming that is an even number.

If the value of the jackpot processing control pointer is even in step Y1021, the wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 2700 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, the off-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In addition, step Y1023
Then, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for each of the large winning openings.

On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot processing control pointer is an odd number in step Y1021, the jackpot opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, 25,000 ms is set as the opening time of the big winning opening when the value of the processing control pointer during the big hit is 1. Next, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. Since only the upper prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) repeats opening and closing during one round in the game machine of the present embodiment, on-data is saved for the upper prize winning solenoid in step Y1024. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the game machine, the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) may be able to be repeatedly opened and closed in one round.

After that, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y1026), and if it is a special figure 1 big hit (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1026). Step Y1027), the jackpot operation transition setting process is completed. In addition, special figure 1
If it is not a big hit (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit operation transition setting process is ended. By the above processing, it is possible to repeatedly open and close the big winning opening in one round.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
FIG. 82 shows the large winning opening remaining ball processing (steps Y113, Y144) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the running special game state with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit value area. (Step Y1041)
..

Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y).
1041; N) saves the signal regarding the end of opening the winning opening in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, the interval time corresponding to the large winning opening opening information and the number of rounds this time is set (step Y1043), and the fanfare / processing during the interval 3 is set as the processing number (step Y1044).

The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time and the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, in the case of the lower long opening, the remaining ball processing time of 1700 ms and the interval time of 300 ms are set, so that the interval period is 2000 ms, and the interval effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like in this interval period.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1).
041; Y) performs the jackpot end processing transition setting process (step Y1045), sets the ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step Y1046), and sets the special figure 1 jackpot end process or the special figure 2 jackpot as the processing number. Set 6 for the end process (step Y1)
047).

Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1048). In the case of a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special drawing 1 game processing timer area (step Y1049).
Step Y1050), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit in Special Figure 1 (step Y1048; N), the processing number is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special drawing 2 game processing timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening is completed.

The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is the period from the end of the final round to the elapse of the remaining ball processing time and the elapse of the remaining ball processing time to the end time. For example, in the case of lower long opening, the remaining ball processing time of 1700 ms and the ending time of 2300 ms are set, so the ending period is 40.
It will be 00 ms, and the ending effect will be executed on the display device 41 or the like during this ending period.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 83 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step Y1045) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the end of opening of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071).
.. Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned off and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is turned off.
Set to.

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step Y1072), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step Y1074).

Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step Y1075), and the flag for storing the opening information determination for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the jackpot opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 84 shows the special figure 1 jackpot end process (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
4) was shown. In this special figure 1 jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether or not there is the probability variation operation region passage information set when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h (step Y1101).
). When there is no probability variation operation area passage information (step Y1101; N), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step Y1102), and the process proceeds to step Y1104. In this case, the high probability state is not reached and the normal gaming state is reached. Also, if there is information on passing through the probabilistic operating area (
In step Y1101; Y), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step Y1103), and the process proceeds to step Y1104. In this case, the probability is high and the time is shortened, and the first specific gaming state is reached. That is, in the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h regardless of the jackpot symbol or the game state, the first specific game state is set.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure 1 normal processing (step Y1104), and
The processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1105). Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1106).
.. Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1108).
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y11)
09), the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the lower grand prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1110), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1111). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. After that, the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y11).
12), special figure 1 jackpot end processing is completed.

By performing this special figure 1 jackpot end processing, the special figure variation display game can be started for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interrupt processing, the special figure 2 game is performed after the special figure 1 game processing. In order to perform the processing, the timer interrupt that has performed the special figure 1 jackpot end process is used to start the special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 game processing, and the special figure 2 variation display game is performed rather than the special figure 1 variation display game. Can be started earlier. Therefore, in step Y1112, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area.
The start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interrupt.

That is, the second variable display game execution control means is the first until the game control device 100 can execute the process related to the start of the first variable display game after the end of the special game state. 2 Variable display A game processing standby means for preventing the processing related to the start of the game from being executed.

[Special figure 2 jackpot end processing]
FIG. 85 shows the special figure 2 jackpot end process (step Y14) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
5) is shown. In this special figure 2 big hit end process, first, it is determined whether or not there is the probability variation operation region passage information set when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h (step Y1121).
). When there is no probability variation operation area passage information (step Y1121; N), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step Y1125), and the process proceeds to step Y1126. In this case, the high probability state is not reached and the normal gaming state is reached. Also, if there is information on passing through the probabilistic operating area (
Step Y1121; Y) determines whether or not it is a hit in the special figure 2 variable display game started in the first specific gaming state (step Y1122).

When it is a hit in the special figure 2 variable display game started in the first specific game state (step Y)
1122; Y), that is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is a hit in the case of the main variation special figure, the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step Y1124), and the process proceeds to step Y1126. In this case, the probability is high and the time is shortened, and the first specific gaming state is reached. Further, if it is not a hit in the special figure 2 variable display game started in the first specific game state (step Y1122; N), that is, if the special figure 2 variable display game is not a main variable special figure, it is a hit. The jackpot end setting process 3 is performed (step Y1123), and the process proceeds to step Y1126. In this case, the probability is high, but the time is not shortened and the second specific gaming state is reached. That is, regardless of the jackpot symbol, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h, the probability is high, but if the hit is on the main fluctuation special map, the time is shortened, and the hit must be on the main fluctuation special map. For example, it is designed not to be in a short time state.

Next, "0" is set as the processing number related to the special figure 2 normal processing (step Y1126), and
The processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1127). Then, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1128).
.. Here, the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 3 signal are set to OFF. After that, the signal regarding the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1129). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 hit signal, and the special symbol 2 hit signal are set to OFF.

Next, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).
Save the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the upper prize opening (step Y11)
31), the flag during the fraudulent monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132), the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1133), and the special figure 2 jackpot end process is completed. By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 86 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (steps Y1103, 1124) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (the state in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shortened) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1141). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1142). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are turned on.
Set to. After that, save the high probability and time saving flags in the special figure game mode flag area (
Step Y1143), the initial value (here, 100) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number region for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state (step Y1144).

Next, the number with high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1145), and the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1146).
Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. After that, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step Y1147), the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1148), and the jackpot end setting process is performed. End 1 By this processing, the high probability state and the time saving state are set, and the first specific gaming state is set.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 87 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (steps Y1102, 1125) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1).
151). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to OFF.

Next, the signal relating to the start of the low probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1152). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal, and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal are set to OFF. After that, the low probability and no time saving flags are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1153).

Next, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1154), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1155).
Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. After that, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step Y1156), the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1157), and the jackpot end setting process is performed. 2
To finish. By this processing, it becomes a low probability state and there is no time reduction, and it becomes a normal game state.

[Big hit end setting process 3]
FIG. 88 shows the jackpot end setting process 3 (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
23) was shown. In the jackpot end setting process 3, first, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1161). Here, the jackpot 2 signal is set to ON. The big hit 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

Next, the signal relating to the start of the high probability state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1162). Here, the special symbol 1 high-probability state signal and the special symbol 2 high-probability state signal are O.
Set to N, and set the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortened state signal and the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortened state signal to O.
Set to FF. After that, the high probability and no time saving flags are saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1163), and the initial value (initial value) in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure change display game in the high probability state. Here, save 100) (step Y11)
64).

Next, the number with high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1165), and the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1166).
Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. After that, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game status display number 2 area (step Y1167), the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1168), and the jackpot end setting process is performed. 3
To finish. By this processing, the high probability state and the time reduction are achieved, and the second specific gaming state is reached.

By the above processing, it is possible to set the specific gaming state which is a high probability state until the special figure variation display game is executed 100 times after the end of the first special gaming state. That is, the game control device 10
0 serves as a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes a special result is higher than that of the normal state for a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. In addition, the specific game state generating means is designed to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game will be the first special result for a predetermined period as the specific game state, as compared with the normal state.

[Small hit fanfare middle processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare middle processing (steps Y115, Y146) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 89, in this small hit fanfare middle process, first, branching is performed according to an open pattern (step Y1).
201).

If the opening pattern is a small hit 1 in step Y1201, prepare a small hit opening command for opening the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) (step Y1202), and perform the effect command setting process (step Y1202). Step Y1203). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1204), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y1205).

After that, the small hit opening time 1 (48 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, save the lower prize opening on-data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (
Step Y1208) and step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is a small hit 2 in step Y1201, a small hit opening command for opening the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is prepared (step Y1209).
, The effect command setting process is performed (step Y1210). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1211), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1212).

After that, the small hit opening time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is a small hit 3 in step Y1201, a small hit opening command for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step Y1216).
, The effect command setting process is performed (step Y1217). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1218), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1219).

After that, the small hit opening time 3 (1200 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

If the opening pattern is a small hit 4 in step Y1201, a small hit opening command for opening the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step Y1223).
, The effect command setting process is performed (step Y1224). Next, 8 related to the small hit medium processing is set as the processing number (step Y1225), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step Y1226).

After that, the small hit opening time 4 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and the signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing processing according to these small hit types, clear the large winning opening count area that counts the number of winnings to the large winning openings (
Step Y1230), the processing during the small hit fanfare is completed.

[Small hit medium processing]
FIG. 90 shows the small hit medium processing (steps Y116, Y147) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit middle process, first, the small hit end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y12).
42). Next, branching is performed according to the open pattern (step Y1243).

When the opening pattern is the small hit 1 in step Y1243, 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1244), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step). Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). End the hit processing.

When the opening pattern is the small hit 2 in step Y1243, 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1248), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step). Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (600 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). End the hit processing.

When the opening pattern is small hit 3 or 4 in step Y1243, 9 related to the small hit remaining ball processing is set as the processing number (step Y1252), and the processing number is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area. (Step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3
(Here, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254).
), Save the off-data in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255)
), End the small hit medium processing.

In steps Y1247, Y1251 and Y1255, off-data is set for both the upper winning opening solenoid and the lower winning opening solenoid, and the closing process is performed for each of the winning openings.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
FIG. 91 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (steps Y117, Y148) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game processing and special drawing 2 game processing. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit is a small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y1271). In the case of the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; Y), 10 related to the special figure 1 small hit end processing is set as the processing number (step Y1271; Y).
Step Y1272), the processing number is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step Y).
1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

If it is not the small hit of the special figure 1 (step Y1271; N), 10 related to the special figure 2 small hit process is set as the processing number (step Y1275), and the processing number is set in the special figure 2 game processing number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277).
The process proceeds to step Y1278.

Then, the signal relating to the end of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Furthermore, the large winning opening count area is cleared (step Y127).
9), the small hit remaining ball processing is completed.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 92 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y11) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process.
8) was shown. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 1 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1305). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y1307), and if it is in the first specific gaming state (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. Also, the first
When not in the specific gaming state (step Y1307; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here, 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310). ), End the special figure 1 small hit end process. Here, too, by saving the special figure 2 game wait time value in the special figure 2 game processing timer area, the start processing of the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt processing, and the special figure 1 variable display game. And special figure 2 The variable display game is processed by the same timer interrupt.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 93 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y14) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 game process.
9) was shown. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 related to the special figure 2 normal process is set as the process number (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

Next, the signal regarding the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y).
1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y13).
35). After that, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y13).
36), clear the special figure status area (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicates that neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is in the first specific game state (step Y1338), and if it is in the first specific game state (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated. When the player is not in the first specific gaming state (step Y1338; N), the signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is completed.

[Design fluctuation control processing]
FIG. 94 shows the symbol variation control processing (steps Y120, Y153) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. The symbol fluctuation control process is a process of controlling the fluctuation of the special symbol on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 and setting the display data of the special symbol. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (special figure 1 or special figure 2) is changing (step Y1401).

Then, when the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the symbol to be controlled is acquired. Is updated by -1 (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the value of the timer is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), step Y140
Move to 8. When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), and the symbol to be controlled is controlled. The variable symbol number according to the above is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number region is acquired (step Y1408). After that, save the acquired display data in the target segment area (
Step Y1411), the symbol variation control process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410).
), Save the acquired display data in the target segment area (step Y1411),
The symbol fluctuation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled.

[Segment LED editing process]
FIG. 95 shows the segment LED editing process (step X) in the timer interrupt process described above.
112) was shown. In this segment LED editing process, the storage display unit 54 provided in the batch display device 50 displays the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times of opening and closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39). Part 60, the first game state display unit 77 that notifies the player how to hit the left-handed (normal) or right-handed, and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game. Segment L constituting the probability display unit 78 to be notified
Make settings related to driving the ED.

In this segment LED editing process, first, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and a segment is obtained. Save to the area (step X602). Next, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 is defined is set (step X603), display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X604).

Then, the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the probability display unit 78 is defined is set (
Step X605), the display data corresponding to the game status display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 77 is defined is set (step X607), the display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area (step X607). Step X608), the segment LED editing process is completed.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 96 shows a magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

In this magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the third input port 12 is output from the magnetic sensor 61.
From the state of the detection signal captured in 4 (input port 3), it is determined whether the magnetic sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is on, that is, a state in which abnormal magnetism is detected (step X6).
11). When the magnetic sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 to check whether the timer has timed up. Determine (step X613).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X).
614), the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer (60,000 ms in this case) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), and a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X6).
17), it is determined whether the prepared magnet invalid flag matches the value of the magnet invalid flag region (step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611;
N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and the magnet fraud notification timer that defines the magnet fraud notification time is not 0-.
1 Update (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620).
Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraud notification period ends or the fraud notification is sent from the beginning. If it has not been done, prepare a command to end the magnet fraud notification (step X621).
). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622).
, It is determined whether the prepared magnet invalid flag matches the value of the magnet invalid flag region (step X623).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet invalid flag is saved in the magnet invalid flag area (step X624), the effect command setting process is performed (step X625), and the magnet illegal monitoring process is completed. To do.

[Screen radio wave fraud monitoring process]
FIG. 97 shows the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above.
)showed that. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the proximity I / F12 is output from the panel radio wave sensor 62.
From the state of the detection signal taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via 1a, it is determined whether the panel radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (
Step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer (here, 60000 ms).
Is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

Then, a command for notifying the board radio wave is prepared (step X633), a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, or -1 is updated ( Step X635). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step X63).
6).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period ends or the fraudulent notification is sent from the beginning. If this is not done, prepare a command to end the board radio wave fraud notification (step X637), prepare a board radio wave fraud release flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and set the prepared board radio wave fraud flag to the board radio wave. Determine if it matches the value of the invalid flag area (step X63)
9).

Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), the effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring is performed. End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 98 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above.
showed that. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step X105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108), and the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113)
, Processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or amusement park internal management device or a test firing test device based on the monitoring result in the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) and set it in the output buffer. And so on.

In this external information editing process, first, it is determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701), and if a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is generated. ) Determine if an open error is occurring (step X702).
Then, when the main body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the off data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the off data of the security signal is saved as external information. Save to the output data area (step X704), and move to step X707.

On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y) or the main body frame (step X701; Y)
Front frame 12) When an opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the on-data of the door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), and the game machine error status signal is displayed. Save the on-data in the test signal output data area (step X706)
, Step X707. That is, the information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are open is output as external information.

Next, if the security signal control timer that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is not 0, the security signal control timer is updated by -1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is 0.
Is set to.

Then, when the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N),
That is, when the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. As a result, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized. When the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), is the frame radio wave fraud occurring, which is to detect an abnormal radio wave by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12. Is determined (step X709).

When the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. Further, when the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step X71).
1). Then, when the switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch error error is occurring (step X)
711; Y) saves the on-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step X712), and proceeds to step X713.

Then, during magnet fraud (step X713; Y), board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X7).
14; Y), a large winning opening fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), and special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step X716; Y), the on-data of the security signal is output as external information. Save in the data area (step X718), save the on-data of the game machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (step X719), and step X7.
Move to 20. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 has occurred, the off-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and step X72.
Move to 0.

Then, the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) for editing the winning signal to the first starting winning opening 36 and the starting port 2 signal editing process (step X721) for editing the winning signal to the second starting winning opening 37 are performed. Do. Next, the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the symbol fixed number signal editing process for setting the information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starting port 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 99 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X72) in the above-mentioned external information editing process.
0) was shown. In this start port 1 signal editing process, first, the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0.
If not, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733).
).

Then, when the number of times of signal output of the start port 1 is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1
The number of signal outputs is updated by -1 (step X734), and the initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is saved in the start port 1 signal output control timer area (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal. (For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is completed. Further, when the number of times of signal output of the start port 1 is 0 (step X7).
33; Y) saves the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738), and ends the start port 1 signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N),
It is determined whether the start 1-port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X736).
.. The fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X736; Y), the process is performed in step X7.
Move to 37. If the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is set to RWM.
It is saved in the external information output data area of (step X738), and the start port 1 signal editing process is completed. The start port 2 signal editing process (step X7) in the above-mentioned external information editing process.
21) performs the same processing as the start port 1 signal editing process for the start port 2 signal.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 100 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X) in the above-mentioned external information editing process.
722) was shown. The main prize ball signal editing process is the number of prize balls generated by winning a prize in the winning opening (
This is a process of outputting a main prize ball signal generated every time a predetermined number (10 in this case) is to be paid out to an external device.

In this main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step X743).
).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (step X743; N), the number of main prize ball signal outputs is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of this main prize ball signal output control timer is the ON state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal.
Time (eg 128ms) and off state (eg low level) time (eg 64)
The time obtained by adding ms) is (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X).
747), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step X743; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X74).
6). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X746; Y), the process shifts to step X747. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X746; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

[Symbol confirmation count signal editing process]
FIG. 101 shows the symbol determination number signal editing process (step X723) in the above-mentioned external information editing process. The symbol fixed number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed.

In this symbol confirmation count signal editing process, first, if the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not 0, the symbol is updated by -1 (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether the symbol confirmation count signal output count, which is updated by +1 each time the special symbol variation display game ends, is 0. (Step X753).

Then, when the number of symbol confirmation number signal output is not 0 (step X753; N), the number of symbol confirmation number signal output is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main prize ball signal is output to the symbol confirmation number signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (here, 256 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (here, 300 ms) of the symbol confirmation count signal. The time (here, 556 ms) is set. Since the game machine of the present embodiment can simultaneously execute the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the on state time is set to 256 ms and the off state time is set to 300 ms.

After that, the on-data that turns on the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol confirmation count signal editing process is completed. When the symbol confirmation count signal output count is 0 (step X753; Y), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). X758), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N).
Determines whether the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X).
756). The fact that the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms) or more.
When the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on section (step X756; Y)
Moves the process to step X757. When the symbol confirmation count signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step X756; N), the off data for turning off the symbol confirmation count signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X7
48), the symbol editing count signal editing process is completed.

[Probability change operating area switch monitoring process]
Next, the probability variation operation area switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process (step X1).
The details of 16) will be described. As shown in FIG. 102, in the probabilistic operation area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the probabilistic operation area 38h is effective (step X801). The probabilistic operating region 38h is in effect when the detection of the game ball by the probabilistic operating region switch 38d is treated as valid (see FIG. 7). When the probability change operation area 38h is not valid (step X801; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process ends. In addition, the probability variation operation region 3
When 8h is in effect (step X801; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the probability variation operation area switch (step X802).

Then, when there is no input to the probability change operation area switch (step X802; N), the probability change operation area switch monitoring process ends. When there is an input to the probability variation operation area switch (step X802; Y), the probability variation operation area passage command is prepared (step X803), and the effect command setting process is performed (step X804). As a result, the effect control device 300 can execute the effect corresponding to the inflow of the game ball into the probability variation operation region 38h. afterwards,
The probability variation operation area passage information is saved in the probability variation operation area passage information area (step X805).
Probability change operation area switch monitoring processing is terminated.

[Lever solenoid control process]
Next, the lever solenoid control process in the timer interrupt process described above (step X117).
) Will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 103, in the lever solenoid control process, first, it is determined whether the lever solenoid control pointer has a non-update code (here, -1) (step X821). When the lever solenoid control pointer is a non-update code (
Step X821; Y) ends the lever solenoid control process. If the lever solenoid control pointer is not a non-update code (step X821; N), the lever solenoid control timer is updated by -1 (step X822), and the lever solenoid control timer is set to 0.
It is determined whether or not (step X823).

If the lever solenoid control timer is not 0 (step X823; N), the lever solenoid control process ends. When the lever solenoid control timer becomes 0 (step X823; Y), the lever solenoid control table is set (step X8).
24), the table address corresponding to the lever solenoid control pointer is calculated (step X825). Then, the control pointer of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid control point area (step X827), and the output data of the next operation is acquired and saved in the lever solenoid output data area (step X828). After that, the probability variation operation area validity determination flag is acquired and saved in the probability variation operation area validity determination flag area (step X829), and the lever solenoid control process is terminated.

By the above processing, the lever solenoid control pointer is sequentially updated every time a predetermined time elapses, ON and OFF of the lever solenoid 38f are set as shown in FIGS. 7B and 7C, and the probability variation operation region is set. The switch 38d is enabled or disabled. When the operation of the lever solenoid is terminated by satisfying a predetermined condition, the lever solenoid 38f is turned off and the probability variation operation area switch 38d is invalidated by setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer. Then, after setting 0 as the lever solenoid control pointer, -1 is set as the lever solenoid control pointer so that the state in which the operation is stopped continues.

In the above embodiment, the game machine capable of simultaneously executing the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game has been described, but the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are not executed at the same time. It may be a game machine. In this case, one of the special figure variation display games may be executed preferentially, or the special figure variation display game may be executed in the order of winning the starting winning opening. In addition, by adjusting the firing force, the player can select whether to aim at the first start winning opening 36 or the second starting winning opening 37, but at the same time, both starting winning openings can be aimed at. You can do it.

Further, although the high probability state is generated based on the inflow of the game ball into the probability variation operation region 38h, it may be determined whether or not to make the high probability state only by the type of the special result. Also,
The game value given to the special figure 2 variable display game is different depending on whether or not it is the main variable display game, but the game to be given to the special figure 1 variable display game depending on whether or not it is the main variable special figure. You may try to make the values different. The game value to be different is not limited to the presence or absence of the time saving state. For example, the number of rounds in the special gaming state and the opening mode of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 may be different. Further, the ease of inflow of the game ball into the probability variation operation region 38h may be different. In addition, the number of games to be shortened may be different. In addition to this, as a game value in the production, whether or not to execute a specific video or audio may be different. Further, these combinations may be used.

Further, the game value to be given may be determined in consideration of not only whether or not it is the main fluctuation special figure but also other conditions. For example, in the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit when it is not the main variable special figure, when the type of the special result is the probability variation hit, it is considered as a high probability state when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h. However, the time saving state may not be set, and if the type of the special result is a normal hit, the time saving state may be set to the high probability state when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h. Then, in the case where the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a main fluctuation special figure and a big hit occurs, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h, the probability state is high and the time is shortened. That is, at least it suffices to be involved in the determination of the game value given by whether or not it is a hit in the main fluctuation special chart.

In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game is not the main variable special figure, it becomes a big hit and the probability variation operation area 38
When the game ball flows into h, it is assumed that the game shifts to the second specific game state ST3, but in a predetermined period after the first specific game state ST2 ends and shifts to the normal game state ST1, the main fluctuation special figure It is also possible to shift to the first specific game state ST2 when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation area 38h due to a big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game. This predetermined period may be from the start of the normal game state ST1 to the execution of the predetermined number of games, or may be until the predetermined time elapses. By doing so, the special figure change executed based on the fact that the game ball that has already been launched to the right even though the launch direction is returned to the left is won in the second start winning opening 37. It is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage when a special result is derived in the display game. In this case, the player unintentionally fired it, and the first specific game state ST2
It is possible to prevent the player who is playing the game from being dissatisfied by making it possible to shift to.

On the contrary, when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game which is not the main fluctuation special figure and the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h in this predetermined period, the game shifts to the second specific game state ST3. When a special result is derived in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game other than the predetermined period and the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h, the game may shift to the first specific game state ST2. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming too advantageous to the player side than what was assumed in the design of the game machine.

Further, although the main variation special map is set in all the gaming states, the main variation special map may be set only in some game states. When a special result is derived and the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h in the game state in which the main fluctuation special figure is not defined, one of the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 is predetermined. You may decide which one to move to by the type of special result or a separate lottery.

In addition, the game value given to the hit when it is the main fluctuation special map is higher than the hit when it is not the main fluctuation special map, but conversely, the hit when it is the main fluctuation special map. The game value given may be lower than the hit when is not the main fluctuation special figure. That is, since the frequency of hitting when it is not the main fluctuation special figure is low and it is difficult to generate it.
The game value given in the case of such a rare hit may be increased. Further, when the game ball flows into the probability variation operating region 38h in the normal hit, the frequency is lower and difficult than when the game ball flows into the probability variation operation region 38h in the probability variation hit, so that the game value to be given is added. You may try to make it higher.

Further, as the third specific game state, a state in which the hit probability is low and the time reduction state (with time reduction) in which the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game is shortened may be provided. The effect mode that defines the effect mode of the game state is a time saving mode that can be distinguished from other game states. Also,
The main variation special figure is a special figure 1 variation display game, the main starting area is the first starting winning opening 36, and the firing direction is left-handed in order to aim at the first starting winning opening 36. As a case of shifting to the third specific game state, for example, in the example of FIG. 8, a big hit was obtained in the first specific game state ST2, but V
It is assumed that there is no passage.

Further, the conditions for transition may be set in more detail. For example, in the first specific game state ST2, when a big hit is made in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is not the main fluctuation special figure, but the V is not passed, the first is the case. 3 The transition to the specific game state may be made. Or, in the first specific game state ST2, the probability variation jackpot (12R probability variation or 5R probability variation) in the special figure 1 variation display game that is not the main variation special figure.
However, if the V is not passed, the player may shift to the third specific gaming state. In this case, if the game is a big hit in the special figure 2 variable display game, which is the main variable special map, but the V is not passed, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 and the hit in the main variable special map is made. The game value to be given may be different depending on whether or not the game value is. In this case, the winning value in the case of the main variation special figure is lower than the hit in the case of not the main variation special figure.

Further, when the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the normal game state ST1 and a special result is obtained, the player intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game, or the first specific game state. S
When the game shifts to the normal game state ST1 due to the end of T2, the game ball that has been fired in the game area on the right side in the period until it returns to the left-handed game wins the second start winning opening 37, so that the special figure 2 variable display is displayed. There may be unintended executions by the player, such as the execution of the game. Although these cases are not distinguished in the above-described embodiment, the game values to be given by distinguishing them may be different.

For example, if a special result is derived and passes through V in the special figure 2 variable display game executed based on the winning of the second starting winning opening 37 that occurs in a predetermined period from the end of the first specific gaming state ST2, the first 2 The transition to the first specific game state ST2 may be performed instead of the specific game state ST3. In addition to setting a predetermined period from the end of the first specific game state ST2, a special figure 2 variable display game may be used from the end of the first specific game state ST2 to a predetermined number of times.

From the above, when the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32 and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the game value is given to the player. In a game machine that generates a special gaming state that can be granted, a first start winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 are provided as starting winning openings, and a game ball can be won in the first starting winning opening 36. Based on the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as the variable display game, and the second variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37. A second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a variable display game is provided, and one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is a variable display game according to the game state. Is configured as the main variable display game, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result for one or both of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, the said It is possible to make the game value given to the player different depending on whether or not the variable display game is the main variable display game. Therefore, the game can be performed according to the design of the game machine.

The effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game is provided, and the effect control means is
If one production mode is selected from a plurality of production modes in which the production of the game is different and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, is the variable display game the main variable display game? If the game value given to the player differs depending on whether or not, it is possible to set different production modes according to the game value given. Further, different effect modes can be set between the first specific game state and the second specific game state. Therefore, it becomes easy for the player to grasp the given game value.

Further, the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening are arranged at different positions, and the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are the first starting winning openings by adjusting the firing force of the game ball. It is arranged in the game area 32 so that a state of aiming for a prize in the second start winning opening and a state of aiming for a prize in the second starting winning opening can be selected. Therefore, it is possible to execute the main variable display game according to the player's will.

Further, the first variable display game and the second variable display game can be executed at the same time, and when one variable display game is executed and the result of the other variable display game becomes a special result, , One of the variable display games is ended with the result of the loss.

Further, for one or both of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, when the result of the variable display game is a special result, the variable display game is the main variable display game. It is possible to shift to the first specific game state after the end of the special game state.
If the variable display game is not the main variable display game, it is possible to shift to the second specific game state in which the game value given to the player is lower than that of the first specific game state after the end of the special game state. It becomes. Therefore, the game can be performed according to the design of the game machine.

Further, when the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32 and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the game value can be given to the player. In a game machine that generates a special game state, in the special game state, it is possible to convert into a closed state in which the game ball cannot be won and an open state in which the game ball can be won, and the specific game ball can flow into the inside. Special variable winning device (first special variable winning device 3) including a region (probability variation operating region 38h)
8), a first starting winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 are provided as starting winning openings, and the first variable display as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36. A second variable display game capable of executing the second variable display game as a variable display game based on the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the game and the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37. Based on the fact that the variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) is provided and the game balls that have won the special variable winning device flow into the specific area, the game is more than the case where the game balls do not flow into the specific area. A game state that is advantageous to the player can be generated after the end of the special game state, and depending on the game state, one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is the main variable display game. When the result of the variable display game is a special result for one or both of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, the variable display game becomes the main game. It is possible to make the game value given to the player different depending on whether or not the game is a variable display game. Therefore, the game can be performed according to the design of the game machine.

Further, when the variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32 and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result, the game value can be given to the player. In a game machine that generates a special game state, a first start winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 are provided as starting winning openings, and a variable display is made based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting winning opening 36. The second variable display as the variable display game based on the first variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing the first variable display game as a game and the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37. A second variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) capable of executing a game is provided, and a variable display game of one of a first variable display game and a second variable display game is mainly used according to a game state. It is possible to define it as a variable display game, and when the main variable display game shifts to the specified predetermined game state, a special result is derived in the main variable display game in the game state. In that case, it is possible to shift to the first specific gaming state after the end of the special gaming state, and if a special result is derived in a variable display game that is not the main in the gaming state, the first after the end of the special gaming state. It is possible to shift to the second specific game state in which the game value given to the player is lower than that in the specific game state. Therefore,
It is possible to make the game according to the design of the game machine.

Next, the display mode in the display device 41 will be described. FIG. 104 (a) shows the display in the first specific gaming state ST2. In the upper left portion of the display area of the display device 41, a game state display 81 that displays the current game state is displayed. Here, it is displayed as the small hit RUSH mode, which is the name of the first specific game state ST2. Further, a launch direction instruction display 82 for instructing the launch direction is displayed in the upper right portion of the display area. In the launch direction instruction display 82, the launch direction is displayed by the direction of the arrow and the characters. In addition, the game status display 81 is in the upper left part of the display area.
Below is a remaining number display 83 that displays the remaining number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in the current gaming state.

Further, in the center of the display area, a suggestion effect display 84, which is an effect suggesting the result of the special figure variation display game being executed, is displayed. The suggestion effect display 84 suggests the result of the special figure variation display game by the action of the character 84a and the dialogue 84b. Further, the running direction of the character 84a of the suggestion effect display 84 is set to be the same as the firing direction (here, the right direction). Further, on the right side of the center of the display area, an expectation degree display 86 indicating an expectation degree that the running special figure variation display game becomes a big hit is displayed. In this expectation degree display 86, a plurality of regions are arranged vertically, and the expectation degree is indicated by the number of regions in which the display color changes sequentially from the lower region and the display color changes. The suggestion effect display 84 and the expectation degree display 86 may be displayed at all times, or may be displayed only when necessary, such as when performing an effect.

Further, an operation promotion display 87 for prompting the operation of the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area and below the expectation degree display 86. The operation promotion display 87 is displayed during a period during which the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 is reflected in the effect in the operation reflection effect, and prompts the player to operate the operation. Further, in the lower center of the display area of the display device 41, a decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85 for displaying a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is provided. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information in a variable manner in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas and then stopping and displaying the identification information.

FIG. 104 (b) shows the display in the second specific gaming state ST3. FIG. 104 (a)
The display position of the launch direction instruction display 82 is different from that in the case of the first specific game state ST2 shown in the above, and is displayed at the upper part of the display area. The point that the firing direction is displayed by the direction of the arrow and the character is the same, but the display mode such as the displayed width is different. Further, the effect on the suggestion effect display 84 is performed by the character 84a and the dialogue 84b as in the case of the first specific game state ST2, but the direction in which the character 84a runs is the left direction, which is the firing direction. Also,
The decorative special figure variable display game display unit 85 for displaying the decorative special figure variable display game is provided in the center of the display area so as to overlap the suggestion effect display 84. Further, the display mode (display method, display background, mode of the frame surrounding the display, etc.) and the display position of the game state display 89, the remaining number display 83, the expectation degree display 86, and the operation promotion display 87 are the first specific game state ST2. It is the same as the case of.

A storage display unit 88 for displaying start memory information is provided in the lower center of the display area. In the game machine of the present embodiment, the first start memory for suspending the execution of the special figure variation display game is
Since only the start memory is stored, the memory display unit 88 is not displayed in the first specific game state ST2 in which the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game. In this memory display unit 88, the upper limit number of start memory (
Here, a number of display areas 88b corresponding to 4) are provided, and the decorative special figure start memory display 88a corresponding to the start memory one-to-one is displayed side by side in the storage order in this display area 88b. Here, it is shown that there is one start memory. The decorative special figure start memory display 88a displayed in the leftmost display area 88b is the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory stored first.
Every time it is digested, it shifts to the left. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure 1 variation display game corresponding to each start memory and the look-ahead result such as the variation pattern by the display mode.

On the left side of the storage display unit 88, an execution storage display unit 89 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed is provided. The running memory display unit 89 has a decorative special figure start memory display 88 at the left end of the memory display unit 88 at the start of the special figure variation display game.
a shifts, and the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed, the variation pattern, and the like are suggested by the display mode.

Since both the first specific game state ST2 and the second specific game state ST3 have a high probability of jackpot, the display on the display device 41 is partially shared as described above, so that the probability is high in both cases. It is possible to perform a unique effect in the state and improve the interest of the game. Further, by making the display common, it is possible to standardize the data and processing of the image and the effect stored in the effect control device 300, and it is possible to reduce the burden of controlling the game.

FIGS. 104 (c) and 104 (d) show an example of the warning display 90 displayed when the launch of the game ball in a launch direction different from the instructed launch direction is detected. The warning display 90 is performed when the effect control device 300 receives a right-handed instruction notification command or a left-handed instruction notification command from the game control device 100, and is set by the start port switch monitoring process (see FIG. 36). When a right-handed instruction notification command or a left-handed instruction notification command is received, a warning display 90 is displayed.
When a right-handed instruction notification command or a left-handed instruction notification command set in any other manner is received, the launch direction instruction display 82 is started. The identification of these commands is performed by the effect control device 300.
The command may be identified according to the situation when the command is received, or the game control device 100 may add and transmit information that can identify these commands.

FIG. 104 (c) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the first specific game state ST2.
FIG. 104 (d) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the second specific game state ST3. In either case, the warning display 90 is displayed in the center of the display area in front of the other displays in preference to the other displays. The warning display 90 in the case of the first specific gaming state ST2 shown in FIG. 104 (c) is shown in FIG.
Similar to the launch direction instruction display 82 in the second specific game state ST3 shown in 4 (d), it is displayed by a horizontally long arrow extending to the left and right of the display area. Further, the warning display 90 in the case of the second specific game state ST3 shown in FIG. 104 (d) is displayed by a thick arrow like the launch direction instruction display 82 in the first specific game state ST2 shown in FIG. 104 (c). The arrow.

FIGS. 104 (e) and 104 (f) show another example of the warning display 90. FIG. 105 (e) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the first specific game state ST2, and FIG. 105 (f) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the second specific game state ST3. In this example, the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 105 (e) and the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 105 (f) are displayed differently. It can be said that the examples of FIGS. 104 (c) and 104 (d) are warning displays 90 having different display modes and display contents, and the examples of FIGS. 104 (e) and 104 (f) have the same display mode. It can be said that the display is 90.

Further, FIGS. 105 (a) and 105 (b) also show another example of the warning display 90. FIG. 105 (a) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the first specific game state ST2, and FIG. 105 (b) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the second specific game state ST3. In this example, FIG. 105 (
The display mode and display contents of the warning display 90 shown in a) and the warning display 90 shown in FIG. 105 (b) are the same.

Further, FIGS. 105 (c) to (f) also show another example of the warning display 90. FIG. 105 (c)
Is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the first specific game state ST2, and FIG. 105 (d) is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the second specific game state ST3. In addition, FIG. 105 (e)
) Is an example of displaying the warning display 90 in the normal game state ST1, and FIG. 105 (f) shows a state in which the hit probability is low and the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game is shortened (there is a time reduction). ), A warning display 90 when the third specific game state (time saving mode) is provided.
Is an example of displaying. Since the third specific game state has a short time, the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the launch direction is right-handed. In this example, the display mode and display contents of the warning display 90 shown in FIGS. 105 (c) to 105 (f) are the same in all gaming states. The warning display 90 shown in FIG. 105A can also be used in common in all gaming states.

In addition to this, as a display to be displayed on the display device 41, a standby display for notifying that the player is in the special game state and is waiting for the start of a new special figure variation display game may be performed. When a small hit or a big hit occurs in the special figure variation display game and a special game state occurs, a new special figure variation display game cannot be started until the special game state ends. In particular, when a special figure variation display game that is not the main variation special figure results in a special result and a special gaming state occurs, the player often does not intend, and the special figure variation display game that is the main variation special map is temporary. There is a risk that the player may feel distrust of the situation in which the game cannot be started.

Therefore, a standby display for notifying the player that the special figure variation display game cannot be started because a special game state has occurred may be displayed so that the player does not feel distrust. .. As such a standby display, for example, a display prompting the display device 41 to wait for a while may be displayed, or a display for clearly notifying that a small hit has occurred may be displayed. You can do it. If a big hit occurs, it can be clearly recognized, so the standby display may not be performed.

Further, it may be possible to select whether or not to perform the standby display according to the game state. For example
The main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game, normal game state ST1 and second specific game state ST3.
Then, the standby display is performed, and the specific display is not performed in the first specific game state ST2. In the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3, the fluctuation time is set to be very long for the special figure 2 variable display game that is not the main variable special figure, so when the special figure 2 variable display game is started. It is conceivable to forget that the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Since the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is only a small hit and a big hit, the player forgets that the game is being executed. Special figure 2 When the variable display game ends and a special game state is unintentionally generated. As described above, the special figure 1 variable display game, which is the main variable special figure, is temporarily unable to be executed. In particular, since a predetermined number of start memories can be stored in the special figure 1 variable display game, the player may feel distrust about the situation where the special figure variable display game cannot be started even though there is a start memory. .. Therefore, the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state S
In T3, it is preferable to perform a standby display to notify that the special figure variation display game is waiting to be executed.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modified example has a different operation mode of the first special variable winning device 38. In addition, this modification can be applied to an embodiment other than the first embodiment.

FIG. 106 shows the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 in this modified example.
The open mode of is shown. The lower long opening shown in FIG. 106 (a) is the same as that in FIG. 7 (a).
The upper V opening shown in FIG. 106 (b) is different from FIG. 7 (b) in that the first special variable winning device 38 is continuously opened without being closed in the middle of the round. The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the probability change operation area switch 38d are the same as those in FIG. 7B. The upper short opening shown in FIG. 106 (c) is different from FIG. 7 (c) in that the opening mode of the first special variable winning device 38 is the same as the upper V opening shown in FIG. 106 (b). The operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the probability change operation area switch 38d are the same as those in FIG. 7 (c).

That is, the opening mode of the first special variable winning device 38 is the same for both the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, and can be set regardless of the type of special result. On the other hand, the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the probability variation operation area switch 38d are determined based on whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot, and are determined based on the type of special result. .. Regarding the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the probability variation operation area switch 38d, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 106 (b) is set in the case of the probability variation jackpot, and the first operation mode is set in the case of the normal jackpot. The second operation mode shown in FIG. 106 (c), in which it is difficult to flow into the probability variation operation region 38h, is set.

In the operation mode shown in FIG. 7, since the opening period of the first special variable winning device 38 is short and only a small number of game balls can be won in the upper short opening, the same number of rounds of the probability variation jackpot and the normal jackpot are the rounds of the upper short opening. The number of prize balls that can be obtained by the normal jackpot was reduced by that amount. However, by making it as shown in FIG. 106, the same number of prize balls as in other rounds can be obtained even in the upper short opening as compared with the case shown in FIG. The number of balls can be the same.

It should be noted that both the opening mode of the first special variable winning device 38 in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 106 (b) and the opening mode of the first special variable winning device 38 in the upper short opening shown in FIG. 106 (c). Although continuous opening is used as the same opening mode, the closing may be sandwiched in the middle as in the opening mode in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 7 (b) in the case of FIGS. 106 (b) and (c). Further, in the case of FIGS. 106 (b) and 106 (c), the first special variable winning device 38
The opening mode is the same, but may be different. In the case of FIG. 106 (c), any open mode may be used as long as a predetermined number of game balls can win a prize, and the predetermined number may be less than the specified number which is a condition for ending the round. Further, the upper short opening shown in FIG. 7C may also be selectable, and the opening mode may be selected according to the type of special result.

Further, regarding the operation of the lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the probability variation operation area switch 38d, the first operation mode shown in FIG. 106 (b) in the case of the probability variation jackpot and FIG. 1 in the case of the normal jackpot.
In the second operation mode shown in 06 (c), the operation mode of the first lever solenoid 38f and the effective state of the probabilistic operation area switch 38d are the same (t31 to t33 and t51 to t5).
3) It may be different. In the case of a normal jackpot, it is sufficient to set an operation mode in which it is more difficult to flow into the probability variation operation region 38h than in the operation mode set in the case of the probability variation jackpot, and the operation mode and the like can be arbitrarily set.

Further, in the upper V opening shown in FIG. 106 (b), the waiting period (t32 to t36) from the end of the operation of the first lever solenoid 38f (t32) to the start of the operation of the second lever solenoid 38f (t36) is constant. Although it is set as a time, this time can be set arbitrarily. However, the specified time (for example, 30 seconds from opening), which is a condition for closing the first special variable winning device 38.
It is preferably a predetermined time shorter than that (for example, 5 seconds to 10 seconds).

Further, this waiting period may be set according to conditions other than time. For example, after the end of the operation (t32) of the first lever solenoid 38f, the standby period ends based on the fact that a predetermined number of game balls have won the first special variable winning device 38, and the second lever solenoid 3
The operation of 8f may be started. In this case, the predetermined number is preferably smaller than the specified number (for example, 10), which is a condition for closing the first special variable winning device 38, and preferably less than half (for example, 5). This predetermined number is a value close to the specified number (for example, 8)
If the number is 9 or 9), the possibility of flowing into the probability variation operation region 38h becomes extremely low, and the possibility of not being able to shift to the high probability state despite the probability variation jackpot increases. Of course, the predetermined number may be a value close to the specified number (for example, 8 or 9), and in this case, the game of whether or not the final several winning balls can shift to the high probability state can be played. It should be noted that both the time and the number of winnings may be set as the end condition of the waiting period, and the waiting period may be ended based on the achievement of either one.

From the above, the special variable winning device is provided with an inflow control member (lever member 38i) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball cannot flow into a specific area and a state in which the game ball can flow into the specific area. The operation mode control means (game control device 100) for controlling the opening / closing mode of the device and the operation mode of the inflow control member is provided, and the operation mode control means is a specific round among a plurality of rounds for opening the special variation winning device. In, the game ball can flow into the specific area, and the operation mode of the inflow control member in the specific round is the first operation mode and the operation mode to the specific area rather than the first operation mode, depending on the type of the special result. Regarding the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device in the specific round, which is controlled by one of the second operation mode in which the inflow is difficult.
Regardless of the type of special result, it can be controlled in the same opening / closing mode.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the game machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
In the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, (1) special figure 1 variable display game and special figure 2
When one of the variable display games stops with a big hit result (first special result), the other special figure variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result (result other than the special result). (2) When one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game stops with a small hit result (second special result), the other special figure variable display game is interrupted. , (3) When one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is executing the jackpot fluctuation, the other special figure variable display game is changed by other than the jackpot fluctuation. The point is different from the game machine 10 of the first embodiment. Therefore, hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration as that of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly described.

Here, the interruption of the special figure variation display game means that when both special figure variation display games are being executed, the other special figure variation display game is interrupted by deriving a specific special result on one side. , The interruption of the special figure variation display game in the restart control that resumes after the end of the special game state. If it is interrupted, the special figure 1 game interruption flag or the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set according to the interrupted special figure variation display game, and the power supply to the game machine is stopped for these flags. It is designed to retain memory even while it is being played.

[Special Figure 1 Processing during fluctuation]
In the present embodiment, the special figure 1 changing process shown in FIGS. 107 and 108 is executed instead of the special drawing 1 changing process shown in FIG. 64. In addition, steps Y621 to FIG. 108 and FIG. 108 are shown.
The processing of Y630 and the processing of steps Y631 to Y645 are performed in step Y621 shown in FIG.
Since it is the same as the processing of Y630 and the processing of steps Y631 to Y645, the description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 107 and 108, when the special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), the game control device 100 is a special figure 1 jackpot, that is, special figure 1
It is determined whether the result of the variable display game is a big hit (step Y646). If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y646; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set (step Y647), and the special figure 2 interruption command is set. (Step Y648), and the effect command setting process (step Y649).
Is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y640.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted based on the small hit result (second special result) of the special figure 1 variable display game. Special figure 2
If the variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit result.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 1 big hit (step Y646; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step Y631.
That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game becomes a big hit result (first special result), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

[Special Figure 2 Processing during fluctuation]
In the present embodiment, the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIGS. 109 and 110 is executed instead of the special drawing 2 changing process shown in FIG. 65. Steps Y6511 shown in FIGS. 109 and 110
The processing of Y660, the processing of steps Y661 to Y662, and the processing of steps Y664 to Y675 are the same as the processing of steps Y651 to Y660, the processing of steps Y661 to Y662, and the processing of steps Y664 to Y675 shown in FIG. Is omitted.
As shown in FIGS. 109 and 110, when the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), the game control device 100 is a special figure 2 big hit, that is, a special figure 2.
It is determined whether the result of the variable display game is a big hit (step Y676). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y676; N), that is, if the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit, the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set (step Y677), and the special figure 1 interruption command is set. (Step Y678), and the effect command setting process (step Y679).
Is performed, and the process proceeds to step Y670.

That is, in this case, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted based on the small hit result (second special result) of the special figure 2 variable display game. Special figure 1
If the variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to interruption. The interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted at the end of the special game state (second special game state) based on the small hit result.

On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit (step Y676; Y), the process proceeds to the process of step Y661.
That is, in this case, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a big hit result (first special result), the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result. Note that even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already finished the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

By the above processing of FIGS. 107 to 110, when one of the special figure variation display games has a special result, the other special figure variation display game is interrupted or forcibly stopped with a disengagement result. Here, based on the fact that the special figure 1 variable display game results in a big hit, the end control process for forcibly stopping the special figure 2 variable display game with the result of deviation is performed. In addition, the special figure 2 variable display game was interrupted based on the special figure 1 variable display game resulting in a small hit result, and was interrupted after the special game state based on the small hit result was completed. Resume control is performed to restart the game. Further, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game results in a big hit, an end control process is performed to forcibly stop the special figure 1 variable display game with a disengagement result. In addition, special figure 2
Special Figure 1 The variable display game is interrupted based on the result of the small hit, and the special game that was interrupted after the special game state based on the small hit result is terminated is resumed. Control is done.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
In the present embodiment, instead of the special figure 1 small hit end process shown in FIG. 92, the special figure 1 shown in FIG. 111
Execute small hit end processing. Since the processing of steps Y1301 to Y1310 shown in FIG. 111 is the same as the processing of steps Y1301 to Y1310 shown in FIG. 92, the description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 111, the game control device 100 determines whether the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted after executing the process of step Y1310 (step Y1311).

When the special figure 2 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1311; N), the special figure 2 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1314), and the special figure 1 small hit end process is terminated.
Further, when the special figure 2 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1311; Y), the decorative special figure 2 restart command is prepared (step Y1312), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1313). After that, clear the special figure 2 game interruption flag area (step Y1).
314), special figure 1 small hit end processing is completed. As a result, the interrupted special figure 2 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit result in the special figure 1 variable display game.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
In the present embodiment, instead of the special figure 2 small hit end process shown in FIG. 93, the special figure 2 shown in FIG. 112
Execute small hit end processing. Since the processing of steps Y1331 to Y1340 shown in FIG. 112 is the same as the processing of steps Y1331 to Y1340 shown in FIG. 93, the description thereof will be omitted.
As shown in FIG. 112, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted after executing the process of step Y1340 (step Y1341).

When the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted (step Y1341; N), the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1344), and the special figure 2 small hit end process is terminated.
If the special figure 1 variation display game is interrupted (step Y1341; Y), the decorative special figure 1 restart command is prepared (step Y1342), and the effect command setting process is performed (step Y1343). After that, the special figure 1 game interruption flag area is cleared (step Y1).
344), special figure 2 small hit end processing is completed. As a result, the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game is restarted with the end of the special gaming state based on the small hit result in the special figure 2 variable display game.

Further, although not shown, in the present embodiment, in the special figure 1 game process (FIG. 41), first, the special figure 1 game interruption flag set when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted is set. Determine if it is done.
Then, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is not set, that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y101 and step Y10.
Processes 1 to Y120 are performed.
On the other hand, when the special figure 1 game interruption flag is set, that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processes of steps Y101 to Y118 are not performed and step Y
The process proceeds to the process of 119, and the processes of steps Y119 to Y120 are performed. As a result, while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

Similarly, in the present embodiment, in the special figure 2 game processing (FIG. 42), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 game interruption flag that is set when the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted is set. To do.
Then, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is not set, that is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is not interrupted, the process proceeds to step Y131 and step Y13.
Processes 1 to Y153 are performed.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 game interruption flag is set, that is, when the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the processes of steps Y131 to Y151 are not performed and step Y
The process proceeds to the process of 152, and the processes of steps Y152 to Y153 are performed. As a result, while the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

In the first embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific gaming state ST2 is among the variations executed in the first specific gaming state ST2. The fluctuation time is the second shortest (see FIGS. 9 (b), 10 (b), and 10 (d)). As a result, even in the first specific game state ST2, the possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game (irregular fluctuation) is stopped before the special figure 2 variable display game (main variable) is increased, and the special figure 1 variable display is displayed. The jackpot of the game is less likely to be forcibly changed to a missed result.
Here, the small hit probability is higher in the special figure 2 variable display game than in the special figure 2 variable display game (see FIG. 5 (b)). Therefore, the first specific game state ST2 in which the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game is smaller than the normal game state ST1 and the second specific game state ST3 in which the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game. Since the hit game state (second special game state) occurs frequently, the effect mode (game mode managed by the effect control device 300) is set to the small hit RUSH mode.

Further, in the first embodiment, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result (big hit result or small hit result), the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result ( (See FIG. 64), based on the special result (big hit result or small hit result) of the special figure 2 variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result (FIG. 65).
reference).
Therefore, in the first embodiment, the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 variable display game and the small hit variation of the special figure 2 variable display game are executed at the same time, and the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. If does not stop first, the special figure 2 variable display game will be forcibly stopped with a missed result based on the small hit result. Therefore, in the first embodiment, by shortening the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific gaming state ST2, the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game changes in the special figure 2. It increases the possibility of stopping before the small hit fluctuation of the display game.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the above (2) is premised. That is, based on the fact that one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a small hit, the other special figure variable display game being executed is interrupted. Therefore, based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a small hit result, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped due to the loss result. 1 It is possible to lengthen the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the variable display game.
Then, by lengthening the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific gaming state ST2, the game peculiar to the first specific gaming state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), that is, "small hit" It is possible to obtain the effect that the player can fully entertain the "frequent occurrence of".

In the gaming machine that performs simultaneous fluctuations based on the above (1) to (3), the first specific gaming state S
When the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed in T2 is short (specifically, when the special figure fluctuation display game is executed with the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 9 and 10),
An example of the timing chart is shown in FIG. 113.
As shown in FIG. 113, when the special result is derived to enter the special gaming state and “V passage is present” in the special gaming state (that is, the probability variation operation region 3 of the first special variation winning device 38).
When the game ball flows into 8h and is detected by the probability variation operation area switch 38d), after the end of the special game state, the game shifts to the first specific game state ST2 and the small hit RUSH mode starts (t101).
Next, the special figure 1 variation display game, which is an irregular variation based on the first start memory stored before the transition to the first specific game state ST2, starts (t102). Of course, the first start memory may be stored after shifting to the first specific gaming state ST2.

Next, the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the main variation, starts (t103). In this embodiment, the above (3) is premised. That is, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed at the same time are not big hits (see FIGS. 48 and 49). Therefore, when the big hit variation of the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the special figure 2 variable display game does not win the big hit, but can win the small hit. Further, in the present embodiment, in the first specific game state ST2, the lottery result for the special figure 2 variable display game may not be out of order (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 113, since the special figure 1 variable display game has a big hit fluctuation, the special figure 2 variable display game has a small hit fluctuation. Further, the fluctuation time of the small hit variation of the special figure 2 variation display game executed in the first specific game state ST2 is 500 ms or 3000 ms (see FIG. 10 (d)), and in the example shown in FIG. 113, 500 ms is selected. Has been done.

Next, the special figure 2 variation display game ends, and the small hit game state (second special game state) starts (t104). Further, in the present embodiment, since the above (2) is premised, the special figure 2
Based on the small hit result of the variable display game, the running special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted (t104).
Next, when the small hit game state (second special game state) ends, the interrupted special figure 1 variable display game starts (t105). Further, the next special figure 2 variation display game starts based on the second start memory stored before the end of the small hit game state (second special game state) (t105).

Next, the special figure 1 variation display game ends, and the jackpot game state (first special game state) starts (t106). Further, in the present embodiment, since the above (1) is premised, the special figure 1
Based on the fact that the variable display game results in a big hit, the running special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped with a missed result (t106). Since the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific game state ST2 is 700 ms (see FIG. 10B), in the example shown in FIG. 113, the execution time before interruption (execution). When the sum of the completed time A) and the executed time after the interruption (executed time B) reaches 700 ms, the special figure 1 variable display game is finished.
Then, in the case of "no V passage" in the big hit game state (first special game state) (that is, when the game ball does not flow into the probability variation operation region 38h of the first special variable winning device 38), the big hit game After the end of the state (first special game state), the state shifts to the normal game state ST1 and the normal mode starts (t107).

As described above, in the simultaneous fluctuation based on the above (1) to (3), the first specific gaming state ST2
When the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a big hit is started, a big hit is always generated when the execution time (executed time) of the special figure 1 variable display game reaches a preset variable time.
Special Figure 1 The type of the first special result in the variable display game is 12R normal (see FIG. 5A). Since it is rare that "V passage is present" (that is, a high probability state is reached) when the jackpot type is normal, when the special figure 1 variable display game is started in the first specific game state ST2, the relevant Special Figure 1 The result of the variable display game is usually a big hit, and the special figure 1
When the variation display game is, for example, a special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory stored before shifting to the first specific gaming state ST2, as shown in FIG. 113, the variation display game is a special figure 1 variation. The first specific game state ST2 ends only by executing the display game once.

Further, in the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), the small hit game state occurs frequently and the player's ball increases, but the special figure 1 variation executed in the first specific game state ST2 If the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the display game is short, as shown in FIG. 113, the first specific gaming state ST2 ends without the small hit gaming state occurring frequently.
For these reasons, in the example shown in FIG. 113, the player cannot fully enjoy the game peculiar to the first specific gaming state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), that is, "frequent small hits".

Therefore, in the present embodiment, instead of the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 10B,
By adopting the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 114 (a), the first specific gaming state ST2
In the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation is lengthened. That is, the game machine of the present embodiment is a game machine that performs simultaneous fluctuations based on the above (1) to (3), and is FIG. 9 (a), (b), FIG. 10 (a), (c). ), (D), and the variation pattern shown in FIG. 114 (a), the special figure variation display game is executed. The jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 114A and the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 10B differ only in the fluctuation pattern of the special FIG. Therefore, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 114 (a), as in the jackpot fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 10 (b), the fluctuation pattern of special figure 2 is distributed according to the jackpot type, but random numbers are used. It may be decided by the above.

In the case of the present embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific gaming state ST2 has a variation time of 154.
With a probability of / 256 (= about 60%), 60,000 ms (= 1 minute) is selected, and 77/256 (= about 60%).
300,000 ms (= 5 minutes) is selected with a probability of (= about 30%), and 25/256 (= about 10).
%), 600,000 ms (= 10 minutes) is selected. These fluctuation times are longer than the fluctuation times of other fluctuations executed in the first specific gaming state ST2 (FIG. 9 (b),
See FIGS. 114 (a) and 10 (d)).

By lengthening the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific game state ST2 in this way, for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (b), the special figure 1 variation display game Since it is possible to generate a small hit game state with high frequency during execution, the player can fully enjoy the "frequent small hits". Specifically, the fluctuation time is 60.
When 000ms (= 1 minute) is selected, about 1000 balls (prize balls) will be released, 30,000.
When 0 ms (= 5 minutes) is selected, about 5,000 balls will be ejected and 600,000 ms (= 1) will be released.
When (0 minutes) is selected, it is possible to obtain about 10,000 balls, so that the player can fully enjoy the "frequent small hits".
Therefore, even if the first specific game state ST2 ends only by executing the special figure 1 variable display game once, the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game can be lengthened. After increasing the number of balls held by the player by frequently generating a small hit game state, the first
The specific game state ST2 can be ended. Therefore, it is possible to end the first specific game state ST2 after enjoying the game peculiar to the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode), that is, after guaranteeing the ball output. In this way, the first specific game state S
By lengthening the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed in T2, the negative point that the small hit RUSH mode is terminated by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game which is an irregular fluctuation is compensated. A surplus effect can be obtained.

Further, the effect control device 300 executes the specific effect when the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a big hit is executed in the first specific game state ST2. The specific production is, for example,
Special Figure 1 Variable Display An instruction display that displays a count display that counts the number of small hits that have occurred since the start of the game, or an instruction display that instructs the player to aim at the second start winning opening 37, which is the main start area (for example, FIG. 10).
It is an effect of displaying the launch direction instruction display 82) shown in 4 or FIG. 105. The specific effect is not limited to the display effect performed by using the display device 41. That is, the specific effect may be a display effect performed using the display device 41, an acoustic effect performed using the speakers 19a and 19b, and the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46 may be used. It may be a light emitting effect performed by the speaker, a character effect effect performed by using the board effect device 44, or a combination thereof.

For the specific effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 114 (a), the fluctuation time is 60,000 ms (= 1).
Minutes) Special Figure 1 "Specific effect A" executed with the variable display game and the variable time 3000
"Specific effect B" executed together with the special figure 1 variable display game of 00 ms (= 5 minutes) and "specific effect C" executed together with the special figure 1 variable display game of 600,000 ms (= 10 minutes). There is.
The specific effects A to C have different production modes. Specifically, for example, count display,
At least one of the instruction display, the background image, the appearing character image, and the like is different. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game being executed depending on the effect mode of the specific effect.

In the first specific game state ST2, the lottery result for the special figure 2 variable display game may be out of order. In this case, for example, the deviation variation pattern table shown in FIG. 114 (c) is adopted instead of the deviation variation pattern table shown in FIG. 9 (b).

Further, in a high probability state such as the first specific game state ST2 or the second specific game state ST3, even if the specified number of games (100 times in this case) is executed after the end of the special game state, the normal game state ST1 is reached. It may be configured so as not to migrate. That is, the "specified number of games digestion" may be deleted from FIG. 8, and the transition of the game state may be performed only by the end of the special game state based on the derivation of the special result.
Further, in the normal game state ST1, a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game that is not the main variable special figure, and the special game state is set. In the case of "V passing" in the special game state, the special game After the end of the state, the first specific game state S instead of the second specific game state ST3
It may be configured to shift to T2. That is, from FIG. 8, "second specific gaming state ST3"
May be deleted so that the transition of the gaming state is performed only between the normal gaming state ST1 and the first specific gaming state ST2.

As described above, according to the game machine of the present embodiment, the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and the special result is derived in the variable display game. In this case, in the game machine 10 that generates a special gaming state capable of imparting a game value to the player, the first starting winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 are provided as starting winning openings, and the first
The first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening 36, and the variable display is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37. A game mode (effect control device 300) is provided with a variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) for executing a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) as a game.
The first game mode (normal mode, High mode) and the second game mode (normal mode, High mode), in which the first variable display game is mainly defined as the variable display game, as the game mode managed by
The second game mode (small hit RU) defined as a variable display game in which the variable display game is the main
SH mode) and is provided (see FIG. 8), and the special gaming state is the first special gaming state (big hit gaming state) that is executed when the first special result (big hit result) is derived in the variable display game. The second special game state (small hit game), which is executed when the second special result (small hit result) is derived in the variable display game and has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. State), and the variable display game execution control means is a case where the first special result is derived in one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, and the other variable. When the display game is being executed, the execution of the other variable display game is forcibly stopped, and the result of the other variable display game is forcibly set as a result other than the special result (missing result) (above). (Equivalent to the precondition of (1)), when the second special result is derived in one of the first variable display game and the second variable display game, and the other variable display game is being executed. If, the second is based on the second special result.
When the other variable display game is interrupted until the special game state ends (corresponding to the precondition of (2) above) and the first variable display game of the first special result is executed in the second game mode. As the variation pattern of the first variation display game, it is possible to select a variation pattern in which a variation time of a length that allows the second variation display game of the second special result to be executed multiple times during execution of the first variation display game is set. (See FIG. 114 (b)). Specifically, in the present embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation display game, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1 minute, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes can be selected (see FIG. 114 (a)).

Therefore, in the second game mode (small hit RUSH mode), the second special result of the second special result is being executed during the execution of the first variable display game of the first special result (special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is a big hit). Since it is possible to execute the variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is a small hit) with high frequency and generate the second special game state (small hit game state) with high frequency, the second It is configured so that the second game mode can be ended after the game in the game mode (frequent small hits) is enjoyed.
It should be noted that this embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a configuration (probability variation operating area 38h or the like) for determining whether or not a high probability state is generated after the end of the special gaming state.
That is, when the type of the special result is a normal jackpot, the probability state of the jackpot always becomes a low probability state (normal probability state) after the end of the special gaming state based on the normal jackpot, and the probability variation jackpot is achieved. It is also possible to apply to a gaming machine in which the probability state of the jackpot is always in the high probability state (probability variation rate state) after the end of the special gaming state based on the probability variation jackpot.

Further, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot fluctuations of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game executed in the first specific game state ST2 are a fluctuation pattern of a fluctuation time of 60,000 ms (= 1 minute) and a fluctuation time of 300,000 ms ( = 5 minutes) fluctuation pattern and fluctuation time 60,000
It is selected from three fluctuation patterns of 0 ms (= 10 minutes), and all of the fluctuation times in these three fluctuation patterns are greater than the fluctuation times of other fluctuations executed in the first specific gaming state ST2. Long, but not limited to this. That is, at least one of the fluctuation times of each of the three fluctuation patterns may be longer than the fluctuation time of the other fluctuations executed in the first specific gaming state ST2.
Further, in the present embodiment, three fluctuation patterns are prepared as the fluctuation patterns of the jackpot fluctuation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific game state ST2, but the present invention is not limited to these. That is, the number of variation patterns prepared as the variation patterns of the jackpot variation of the special figure 1 variation display game executed in the first specific game state ST2 may be one or a plurality.

Further, in the game machine of the present embodiment, the variable display game execution control means (game control device 10).
0) is the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2).
When one of the variable display games) is executed with the variable pattern for deriving the first special result (big hit result), the variable pattern of the other variable display game is set to the first special. It is possible to configure to select from fluctuation patterns for deriving a result other than the result (small hit result or missed result) (corresponding to the precondition of (3) above).
With such a configuration, the interest of the game is improved. When performing simultaneous fluctuations in which Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are executed at the same time, the player always pays close attention to the trends of both fluctuation display games.
It is not possible to fully enhance the interest of the game because the awareness of the production is reduced. On the other hand, with such a configuration, the player only has to pay attention to the result (big hit result) of one of the variable display games, and the awareness of the production related to the variable display game is increased, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is the first in the second gaming mode (small hit RUSH mode).
A specific effect execution control means (effect control device 300) for executing a specific effect when the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game, that is, irregular variation) of the special result (big hit result) is executed. , When the variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the first variable display game of the first special result in the second game mode, the variable pattern of the first variable display game is set to the variable time. Is selected from a plurality of variation patterns having different effects, and the specific effect execution control means is a plurality of specific effects having different effect modes (specific effects A to C in the present embodiment).
), It is possible to configure to execute a specific effect corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the first fluctuation display game selected by the fluctuation display game execution control means (see FIG. 114 (a)).
With this configuration, it is possible to suggest the fluctuation time of the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) being executed, depending on the effect mode of the specific effect. In addition, since a plurality of specific effects having different production modes can be executed, various effects can be performed and the range of effects is widened.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The display device 41 is different from the gaming machine of this modified example. In addition, this modification can be applied to an embodiment other than the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 115, for example, the gaming machine 10 of this modification includes a main display device 41a and a sub display device 41b as the display device 41.

The main display device 41a (variable display device) has a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display areas) in which seven light emitters (LEDs and the like) are arranged in a figure of eight are arranged. Each light emitting body can independently change the light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emitting color, etc.), and by controlling the light emitting mode, decorative identification information can be displayed for each 7-segment display. It is also possible to display information by combining a plurality of 7-segment displays. In the main display device 41a, a decorative special figure variable display game is executed in which a plurality of decorative identification information is variablely displayed and then stopped and displayed in response to the special figure variable display game. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect related to the special figure variation display game by changing the light emitting mode.

The sub-display device 41b is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode ray tube).
On the display screen of the sub-display device 41b, information about the game such as a character that directs the special figure variation display game and a background image that enhances the effect of the effect is displayed. In addition, the sub display device 41b
On the display screen of, there are decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to undigested start memory, images for production based on the progress of the game (for example, jackpot display image, fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.). Is displayed.
The sub-display device 41b is mounted on the front surface of the movable accessory 44a included in the board effect device 44.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of this modified example has a main display device 41 as shown in FIG.
The left side notification lamp 41cL provided on the left side of a and the right side notification lamp 41cR provided on the right side of the main display device 41a are provided. The left side notification lamp 41cL and the right side notification lamp 41cR are composed of LEDs and the like, and can change the light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emitting color, etc.) independently of each other.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115, for example, the gaming machine 10 of the present modification is provided on the left side of the center case 40 and includes an information display device 48 for displaying information related to the special figure variation display game.
The information display device 48 has a first information display unit that displays the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game, and the number of second start memories, which is the right to execute the special figure 2 variable display game. It is provided with a second information display unit for displaying. In addition, the display device 41 displays the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game by the fourth symbol separately from the decorative special figure variable display game displayed by the first to third symbols. Separately from the decorative special figure variation display game displayed by the information display unit and the display device 41 by the first to third symbols, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game is displayed by the fourth symbol. A fourth information display unit is provided. The first to fourth information display units of the information display device 48 are composed of LEDs and the like.

Since the game machine 10 of the present modification is a game machine that simultaneously changes like the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, a state in which the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are being executed at the same time. It is possible to In the case of the second embodiment, since the decorative special figure variable display game is displayed on the display device 41 having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game It is possible to simultaneously display the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game on the display device 41. On the other hand, in the case of this modified example, the decorative special figure variation display game is
Since it is displayed on the main display device 41a having a configuration in which three 7-segment displays are arranged side by side, special figure 1
The decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game and the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be displayed on the display device 41 at the same time.

Therefore, in this modification, when the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game (when the game state is the normal game state ST1 or the second specific game state ST3, that is, the effect mode is the small hit R.
In a mode other than the USH mode), the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is displayed on the display device 41 (main display device 41a), and the main variable special figure is the special figure 2 variable display. In the case of a game (when the game state is the first specific game state ST2, that is, when the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode), the display device displays the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game. It is to be displayed on 41 (main display device 41a).

Specifically, when the effect mode is a mode other than the small hit RUSH mode, the effect control device 300 displays information on the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game with the display device 41. The decorative special figure variation display game, which is displayed on both the device 48 and corresponds to the special figure 2 variation display game, is displayed on the information display device 48 but not on the display device 41. On the other hand, when the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode, the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the information display device 48 but not on the display device 41. FIG. 2 Decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the variation display game, display device 41 and information display device 4
Display on both sides of 8.

Further, in the present modification, it is determined by the notification lamps 41cL and 41cR whether the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game or the special figure 2 variation display game.
Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 116A and 117, for example, when the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game (that is, the effect mode is the small hit RUS).
In the mode other than H mode), the notification lamps 41cL and 41cR emit white light (in the case of a mode other than H mode).
When the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (that is, when the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode), the notification lamps 41cL and 41cR are emitted in red (lighting or blinking). Blink). That is, the emission color of the notification lamp is switched between the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable special figure. As a result, the game machine performs simultaneous fluctuations, and the display device 41 has a special figure 1 variable display game (specifically, a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game) and a special figure 2 variable. Even if the game machine cannot simultaneously display the display game (specifically, the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game), the player can display the special figure 1 variable depending on the emission color of the notification lamp. It is possible to easily recognize whether the game or the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and whether or not the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode.

Note that the notification lamps 41cL, 41c when the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.
The emission color of R is not limited to white. Further, when the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game, the emission color of the notification lamps 41cL and 41cR is not limited to red. That is, when the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the notification lamps 41cL and 41cR are made to emit light in the first emission color, and when the main variation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game, the notification lamps 41cL and 41cR are made to emit light. Notification lamp 41cL,
It suffices that 41cR is configured to emit light in a second emission color different from the first emission color.

Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIGS. 116 (b) and 118, when the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game (that is, when the effect mode is a mode other than the small hit RUSH mode), When the left side notification lamp 41cL (that is, the notification lamp on the firing direction (left-handed) side) emits light (lights or blinks), but the right side notification lamp 41cR does not emit light, and the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 2 variation display game. (That is, when the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode), the right side notification lamp 41cR (that is, the notification lamp on the firing direction (right-handed) side) emits light (lights or blinks), but the left side notification lamp 41cL emits light. It may be configured not to. That is, it may be configured to switch the notification lamp to be in the light emitting state depending on whether the special figure 1 variable display game is executed or the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable special figure.
With this configuration, it is a gaming machine that performs simultaneous fluctuations, and the display device 41 has a special figure 1
Even if the game machine cannot display the variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game at the same time, the player can use the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game depending on whether the left or right notification lamp is lit. It is possible to easily recognize which of the above is executed and whether or not the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode.

It is also possible to combine FIG. 116 (a) and FIG. 116 (b). That is, when the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the left side notification lamp 41cL emits light in the first emission color (for example, white), but the right side notification lamp 41cR does not emit light, and the main variation special figure emits light. In the case of the special figure 2 variable display game, the right side notification lamp 41cR has a second emission color (for example, red).
However, the left side notification lamp 41cL can be configured not to emit light.

Also, instead of (or in addition to) the notification lamps 41cL and 41cR, the notification lamp 41c
It is also possible to suggest whether the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game by the LEDs other than L and 41cR.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 119, a plurality of Ls constituting the main display device 41a.
It is also possible to suggest whether the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game by the ED. In the example shown in FIG. 119, when the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game, the color of the stop symbol (that is, the color of the decoration identification information during the stop display) is the first emission color. When the main variable special figure is the special figure 2 variable display game, the color of the stop symbol is a second emission color different from the first emission color. That is, the color of the stop symbol is switched between the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed as the main variable special figure. With this configuration, the player can determine whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed depending on the color of the stop symbol, and the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode. Whether or not it can be easily recognized. When the special figure 1 variable display game is executed with the color of the variable symbol (that is, the color of the decoration identification information during the variable display) as the main variable special figure in addition to (or instead of) the color of the stop symbol. It is also possible to switch between the case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed and the case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.

Further, for example, whether the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is determined by a plurality of LEDs included in the decorative device (frame decoration device 18 and / or board decoration device 46). It is also possible to suggest. Specifically, for example, when the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the LEDs arranged on the left half side of the game machine among the plurality of LEDs included in the decorative device (that is, the firing direction). The LED on the (left-handed) side) emits light, but the LED arranged on the right half side does not emit light. Of these, the LED arranged on the right half side of the game machine (that is, the LED on the firing direction (right-handed) side) emits light, but the LED arranged on the left half side can be configured not to emit light. is there. With this configuration, the player can make a small hit depending on whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, depending on whether the left or right side of the game machine is shining. Whether or not it is in the RUSH mode can be easily recognized.

Also, is the main fluctuation special figure a special figure 1 variable display game by sound instead of light? Special figure 2
It is also possible to suggest whether it is a variable display game.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), when the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the effect sound based on the voice data A is output from the speakers 19a and 19b, and the main variation is output. When the variable special figure is a special figure 2 variable display game, the voice data B different from the voice data A
The effect sound based on the above may be output from the speakers 19a and 19b. That is,
As the main variable special figure, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b may be switched between the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. With this configuration, even if the game machine is a game machine that performs simultaneous fluctuations and cannot simultaneously display the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game on the display device 41, the player can use the game machine. , The sound from the speakers 19a and 19b makes it easy to recognize whether the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and whether or not the effect mode is the small hit RUSH mode. can do.
The audio data A and the audio data B may be audio data in which the music is different from each other, or the music is the same, but at least one of the pitch, timbre, tempo, tune, range, etc. is different from each other. There may be.

Alternatively, for example, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), when the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the speaker arranged on the left half side of the game machine (that is, the firing direction (left-handed)). )
Side speaker. In the case of this modification, when the sound is output from the upper speaker 19a) on the left side but the sound is not output from the speaker arranged on the right half side, and the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. , The speaker arranged on the right half side of the game machine (that is, the speaker on the firing direction (right-handed) side. In the case of this modification, the sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b on the right side), but the left half. It may be configured so that sound is not output from the speaker arranged on the side. That is,
As the main variable special figure, the speaker to be in the sound output state may be switched between the case where the special figure 1 variable display game is executed and the case where the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. With this configuration, even if the game machine performs simultaneous fluctuations and the display device 41 cannot simultaneously display the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, the player can display the game machine. Depending on whether the sound is heard from the left or right side of the game machine, which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, and whether or not the production mode is the small hit RUSH mode. It can be easily recognized.

It is also possible to combine FIG. 116 (c) and FIG. 116 (d). That is, when the main variation special figure is the special figure 1 variation display game, the effect sound based on the voice data A is output from the speaker arranged on the left half side of the game machine, but is arranged on the right half side. When the main fluctuation special figure is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game without outputting the sound from the speaker, the effect sound based on the voice data B is output from the speaker arranged on the right half side of the game machine. It is also possible to configure the speaker arranged on the left half side so that no sound is output.
It is also possible to suggest whether the main variable special figure is the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game by both light and sound.
Also, instead of (or in addition to) light or sound, whether the main variable special figure is a special figure 1 variable display game or a special figure 2 variable display game by other than light or sound (for example, the movement of a directing accessory) It is also possible to suggest.

As described above, according to the game machine of the present modification, the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening, and the special result is derived in the variable display game. In this case, in the game machine 10 that generates a special gaming state capable of imparting a game value to the player, a first start winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 are provided as starting winning openings, and the first starting is provided. The first variable display game (Special Figure 1 variable display game) is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening, and the variable display game is based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37. A variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) that executes a second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), and a plurality of LEDs (notification lamps 41cL, 41cR, main display device 41a) arranged in a predetermined arrangement. A plurality of LEDs constituting, a plurality of LEDs included in the decoration device, a plurality of LEDs included in the batch display device 50, a plurality of LEDs included in the information display device 48, etc.) and a light emission control means (effect control device) for controlling the plurality of LEDs. 300 (game control device 100 when controlling a plurality of LEDs included in the batch display device 50)).
The light emission control means is configured to have different light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs depending on whether the first variable display game is executed or the second variable display game is executed.

Therefore, whether the variable display game (special figure variable display game) to be executed is the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game). Since it can be suggested by the light emitting mode of the LED, the player can easily recognize which of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is being executed.
It should be noted that this modification can also be applied to a game machine that does not perform simultaneous fluctuations. That is, in the game machine that executes the special figure variation display game in the order of winning the starting winning opening, and the game machine that preferentially executes one of the special figure variation display games (for example, the special figure 2 variation display game), the special figure 1 Multiple LEDs depending on whether the variable display game is executed or the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.
It is also possible to make the light emitting mode of the above different.
Further, this modification can be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a configuration (probability variation operating area 38h or the like) for determining whether or not a high probability state is generated after the end of the special gaming state.

In addition, the gaming machine of this modified example has an effect display device (main display device 41a) capable of executing a decorative variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information in response to a variable display game (special figure variable display game). The variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) is in a state in which the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) are being executed at the same time. As the game mode (game mode managed by the effect control device 300, that is, the effect mode), the first game mode (normal mode) in which the first variable display game is mainly executed as the variable display game is possible. , High mode) and a second game mode (small hit RUSH mode) in which the second variable display game is mainly executed as a variable display game. During the first game mode, the effect display device has a second 1 The decorative variation display game corresponding to the variable display game is displayed, and during the second game mode, the decorative variable display game corresponding to the second variable display game is displayed on the effect display device, and the light emission control means (effect control). Device 3
00) is configured so that the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs are different depending on whether the first variable display game is executed or the second variable display game is executed as the main variable display game (main variable). It is possible to do.

With this configuration, it is a game machine that performs simultaneous fluctuations, and the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the main fluctuation is displayed on the effect display device (main display device 41a), but it corresponds to the irregular fluctuation. Even if the game machine does not display the decorative special figure variable display game, depending on the light emitting mode of the LED, the player can determine which of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is being executed, and the game mode (game mode ( The production mode) is the first game mode (normal mode, High)
It is possible to easily recognize which of the mode) and the second game mode (small hit RUSH mode).
The effect display device is not limited to a display device having a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display areas) are arranged side by side, and is a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display or a dot matrix LED display. You may.

Further, in the game machine of this modified example, the effect display device (main display device 41a) includes a plurality of (three in this modified example) 7-segment displays arranged in a row, and identification information is provided in each of the 7-segment displays. The decorative variable display game corresponding to the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the decorative variable display game corresponding to the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) are simultaneously displayed. It can be configured so that it cannot be displayed.
With this configuration, it is a gaming machine that performs simultaneous fluctuations, and the effect display device (main display device 41a) is a decorative special figure corresponding to the first special figure variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game). Even if the game machine cannot display the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game and the second special figure variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) at the same time, depending on the LED light emission mode.
Whether the first variable display game or the second variable display game is being executed by the player,
It is possible to easily recognize whether the game mode (effect mode) is the first game mode (normal mode, high mode) or the second game mode (small hit RUSH mode).

Further, in the gaming machine of the present modification, the light emission control means (effect control device 300) can be configured to have different light emission modes of the plurality of LEDs by switching the light emission color of the LEDs (FIG. 116). (A), see FIGS. 117 and 119).
With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is being executed depending on the emission color of the LED.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present modification, the light emitting control means (effect control device 300) can be configured to have different light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs by switching the LEDs to be in the light emitting state (FIG. FIG. 116 (b), see FIG. 118).
With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is being executed, depending on which LED is lit.
In this modified example, the light emitting modes of the plurality of LEDs are made different by switching the light emitting color of the LED or switching between the LED in the light emitting state and the LED in the non-light emitting state. The method of differentiating the above can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, by switching between the LED to be lit and the LED to be blinking, a plurality of LEDs
The light emitting mode of the above may be different.

Further, according to the game machine of this modified example, when a variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening and a special result is derived in the variable display game. , In the game machine 10 that generates a special gaming state capable of imparting a game value to a player, a first start winning opening 36 and a second starting winning opening 37 are provided as starting winning openings, and a first starting winning opening is provided. The first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to, and the second variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening 37. A variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) for executing a variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game), speakers 19a and 19b for outputting sound, and sound output control means (effect control device) for controlling the speakers. 300), and the sound output control means is the first
It is possible to configure the speakers 19a and 19b to have different sound output modes depending on whether the variable display game is executed or the second variable display game is executed.

With this configuration, is the variable display game (special figure variable display game) executed the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) or the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game)? Since it can be suggested by the sound output modes of the speakers 19a and 19b, it is possible to easily make the player recognize whether the first variable display game or the second variable display game is being executed. ..
It should be noted that this modified example can also be applied to a game machine that does not perform simultaneous fluctuations. That is, in the game machine that executes the special figure variation display game in the order of winning the starting prize opening, and the game machine that preferentially executes one of the special figure variation display games (for example, the special figure 2 variation display game), the special figure 1 Speaker 19 depending on whether the variable display game is executed or the special figure 2 variable display game is executed.
It is also possible to make the sound output modes of a and 19b different.
Further, this modification can be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a configuration (probability variation operating area 38h or the like) for determining whether or not a high probability state is generated after the end of the special gaming state.

In addition, the gaming machine of this modified example has an effect display device (main display device 41a) capable of executing a decorative variable display game that variablely displays a plurality of identification information in response to a variable display game (special figure variable display game). The variable display game execution control means (game control device 100) is in a state in which the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) and the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) are being executed at the same time. As a game mode (a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, that is, an effect mode), a first game mode (normal mode) in which the first variable display game is mainly executed as a variable display game is possible. , High mode) and a second game mode (small hit RUSH mode) executed as a variable display game in which the second variable display game is the main. During the first game mode, the effect display device has a second game mode. 1 The decorative variation display game corresponding to the variable display game is displayed, and during the second game mode, the decorative variable display game corresponding to the second variable display game is displayed on the effect display device, and the sound output control means (effect). The control device 300) determines the sound output modes of the speakers 19a and 19b depending on whether the first variation display game is executed or the second variation display game is executed as the main variation display game (main variation). It can be configured to be different.

With this configuration, it is a game machine that simultaneously changes, and the decorative special figure change display game corresponding to the main change is displayed on the effect display device (main display device 41a), but it corresponds to the irregular change. Even if the game machine does not display the decorative special figure variation display game, which of the first variation display game and the second variation display game is being executed by the player depending on the sound output mode of the speakers 19a and 19b. , It becomes possible to easily recognize whether the game mode (effect mode) is the first game mode (normal mode, high mode) or the second game mode (small hit RUSH mode).
The effect display device is not limited to a display device having a configuration in which three 7-segment displays (variable display areas) are arranged side by side, and may be a display device having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present modification, the sound output control means (effect control device 300) can be configured to have different sound output modes of the speakers by switching the sounds output from the speakers 19a and 19b. There is (see FIG. 116 (c)).
With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is being executed by the sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b.

Further, the gaming machine of this modified example is provided with a plurality of speakers, and is a sound output control means (effect control device 30).
0) is the speakers 19a, 19b by switching the speaker to be in the sound output state.
It is possible to configure the sound output mode to be different (see FIG. 116 (d)).
With this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize which of the first variable display game and the second variable display game is being executed, depending on which speaker the sound is heard from.
In this modified example, the sound output mode of the speaker is made different by switching the sound from the speaker and switching between the speaker in the sound output state and the speaker in the non-sound output state (mute state). However, the method of differentiating the sound output mode can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, for example, by switching between a speaker that outputs sound at the first volume and a speaker that outputs sound at a second volume lower than the first volume, that is, by making the volume output from each speaker different. , The sound output mode of the speaker may be different.

[Second modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. It should be noted that basically, it has the same configuration as the game machine of the second embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof is omitted, and the description is mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modified example includes a movable member 37b as an ordinary electric accessory that converts a game ball into a state in which the game ball is easy to win and a state in which the game ball does not win (or is difficult to win) in the second starting winning opening 37. ing. In addition, this modification can be applied to an embodiment other than the second embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of this modification is provided with a right-handed lamp 46a, a logo member 46b, and the like as a board decoration device 46 that emits light for decoration and production.
The right-handed lamp 46a is arranged on the right side of the center case 40, for example, as shown in FIG. 115. The right-handed lamp 46a lights up when right-handed is more advantageous to the player than left-handed (when right-handed).
The logo member 46b is arranged on the upper part of the center case 40, for example, as shown in FIG. 115. In this modification, the logo member 46b has a configuration in which four character light emitting parts are arranged side by side, and each character light emitting part can independently change the light emitting mode (lighting, extinguishing, blinking, light emitting color, etc.). You can do it. The character light emitting part on the left side of the two central character light emitting parts moves from the position shown in FIG. 115 to the rear position of the character light emitting part adjacent to the left, and the character light emitting part on the right side of the two central character light emitting parts. May move from the position shown in FIG. 115 to the rear position of the character light emitting unit on the right side, and the notification lamp or the like may appear from the inside.

Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 115, in the game machine 10 of the present modification, on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start) that gives a start condition of the normal figure variation display game is given. A gate) 34 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is detected by a gate switch connected to the input unit 120 (see FIG. 11) of the game control device 100.
Further, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the right side of the second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and the center case. One general winning opening 35 is arranged on the right side of the 40 and above the right-handed ramp 46a. The game balls that have won in these general winning openings 35 are the winning opening switches 35a (FIG. 1).
1) is detected.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a first start winning opening 36 that gives a start condition of the special figure 1 variable display game is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 11).
Further, below the first starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that did not win in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, it is to the right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and is the normal drawing start gate 34.
Below the special figure 2, the second start winning opening 37 that gives the start condition of the variable display game, and the game ball that opens by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the left and flows into the second starting winning opening 37. A movable member 37b that can be converted into an easy-to-use state is provided.
The movable member 37b is always held in a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) in which the game ball is vertically closed so that the game ball cannot flow into the second starting winning opening 37. Then, when the result of the normal map variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the output unit 13 of the game control device 100
An open state (advantageous state for the player) in which the upper end side is operated so as to fall to the left by the normal electric solenoid (driving device) connected to 0 (see FIG. 11) and the game ball easily flows into the second starting winning opening 37. ) Can be changed. Game ball that won the second start winning opening 37 (
For example, a game ball that has moved from the front surface side to the back surface side of the game board 30 through the hole 37d shown in FIG. 115) is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 11). It should be noted that the game ball can be won even in the closed state, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state. In FIG. 115, the broken line shows the internal structure of the ordinary variable winning device including the second starting winning opening 37 and the movable member 37b.

Further, on the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. 39 is arranged.
The second special variation winning device 39 has an opening / closing member 39c (not shown) that can be opened by retracting backward and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in, and a special figure variation display as an auxiliary game. Depending on the result of the game, the lower prize opening is changed from the closed state (unfavorable state for the player) to the open state (advantageous state for the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39
Is provided with, for example, a lower prize opening that is opened and closed by an opening / closing member 39c driven by a lower prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 11) as a driving device, and the lower prize opening is closed during a special gaming state. By converting from the state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the lower prize winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the lower prize opening (winning area), a lower count switch 39a (see FIG. 11) is provided as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the lower prize opening.
It should be noted that a plurality of lower count switches 39a may be provided so that any of the lower count switches 39a detects the game ball that has flowed into the lower winning opening. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 39a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the lower winning opening.

Further, below the right-handed ramp 46a on the right side of the center case 40, a first special variable winning device (1st special variable winning device) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game The upper prize opening) 38 is arranged.
The first special variable winning device 38 has a movable member 38c that can be opened and converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right side, and is a special figure as an auxiliary game. Depending on the result of the variable display game, the upper prize opening is changed from a closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper winning opening that is opened and closed by a movable member 38c driven by an upper winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 11) as a driving device, and is in a special gaming state. Is
By converting the upper prize opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the upper prize opening is facilitated, and the player is given a predetermined game value (prize ball). There is. Inside the upper prize opening (winning area), an upper count switch 38a (see FIG. 11) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the upper prize opening.

In the game machine 10 of the present modification, of the game areas 32 in which the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the firing force and launches the game ball to the left game area (
By hitting left, you can aim to win the first starting winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 on the left side, and by launching a game ball into the game area on the right side (so-called right hitting), you can start the general drawing gate 34. , The second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38, the second special variable winning device 39, and the general winning opening 35 on the right side can be aimed at winning.

In the game machine 10 of the present modification, the game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) toward the game area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , Start winning opening 36,37
Alternatively, the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are won, or the game flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, 37, or the special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of winning winning opening is the payout control device 200 (FIG. 11). Discharge unit controlled by (see) to the upper plate 21 or lower plate 23 of the front frame 12.

On the other hand, in the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball passing through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided, and the game area 3
When the game ball driven into the 2 passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch and the normal drawing variation display game is played. In addition, a state in which the normal figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, a state in which the normal figure change display game has already been played and the normal figure change display game has not ended, or a state in which the normal figure change display game hits and is an ordinary electric accessory. When the game ball passes through the normal drawing start gate 34 when (movable member 37b) is converted to the open state, if it is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the normal drawing start storage number, the normal drawing start memory The numbers are added (+1) and one normal figure start memory is stored. The stored number of the normal drawing start prizes is displayed on the general drawing hold display which is provided in the batch display device 50 (see FIG. 115) and is composed of LEDs. In addition, the hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and this hit judgment random value is used as the judgment value. The result of the normal map variation display game is determined with reference to. When the hit determination random value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

The normal-figure variation display game is provided in the batch display device 50 (see FIG. 115) and is displayed by a variable display unit (general-figure display) composed of LEDs. The lighting color forms the normal identification information (normal figure, normal pattern). In addition, the general figure display is configured by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the fluctuations for a predetermined time, the display is stopped and the result is displayed. You may. If the stop display of the normal map variation display game results in a normal map specific result, the normal electric accessory (movable member 37b) is opened for a predetermined time as a hit of the normal map. As a result, the second start winning opening 3
It becomes easier for the game ball to win the prize, and the number of times the special figure 2 variable display game is executed increases.

Next, the game control performed in the control circuit of the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 of the game machine 10 of the present modification will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal drawing start gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch provided in 4, the random value for hit judgment of the normal figure is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the hit of the normal figure fluctuation display game. Performs the process of determining the deviation. Then, a process is performed in which the identification symbol is variablely displayed for a predetermined time on the normal figure display of the batch display device 50, and then the normal figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed is displayed.
If the result of this normal figure fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display of the batch display device 50, and the normal electric solenoid is operated to operate the normal electric accessory (movable member 37).
Control is performed to open b) for a predetermined time. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of sync, the general display device of the batch display device 50 is controlled to display the result mode of the outlier.

Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning opening 36, the random value for jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variation display game is extracted and the RAM 11
The first start memory is stored in 1C. ROM 11 stores the random value for determining the jackpot of the first start memory
Compared with the determination value stored in 1B, the process of determining the hit / miss or the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. In addition, the start port 2 switch 37 provided in the second start winning opening 37
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from a, the random value for determining the jackpot of the special figure 2 variation display game is extracted and the second start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The big hit determination random value or the like in the second start memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss or the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after displaying the identification symbol (identification information) on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 for a predetermined time, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is performed. .. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

Further, the effect control device 300 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100.
Further, the effect control device 300 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs, based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit. At the same time, a process for generating a special game state is performed. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A opens the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by, for example, the upper prize winning opening solenoid 38b, so that the game ball can flow into the upper winning opening. Control to do. Alternatively, the lower special winning opening solenoid 39b opens the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable winning device 39 to control the inflow of the game ball into the lower winning opening.

Then, the large winning opening is opened until either a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls is awarded in the large winning opening, or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means that controls opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. If the result of the special figure variation display game is incorrect, the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 of the batch display device 50
Control is performed to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, in the case of "V passing" in the special game state, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as the game state after the end of the special game state. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that in the low probability state (normal probability state). Further, regardless of which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game results in a high probability state, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game Both are in a high probability state.

Further, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100 is in an electric support state (a game state).
It is possible to generate a time saving state (specific game state). In this electric support state, the normal figure fluctuation display game and the normal electric accessory (movable member 37b) are controlled to be in the electric support operation state.
It is controlled so that the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) per unit time is substantially longer than that in the case where the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) is in the normal operating state. ..

For example, in the electric support state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the normal map fluctuation display game so as to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time (for example). 10000ms is 1000ms). Further, in the electric support state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). It is possible. In addition, in the electric support state, the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a hit result, and the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b)
) Is in the open state, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory (moving member 37b) (opening time of the normal electric power)
Is longer than the first open time (eg 100 ms) in the normal state, the second open time (eg 135 ms)
It is possible to control so as to be 2 ms). In addition, in the electric support state, the number of times the normal electric accessory (movable member 37b) is opened (the number of times the normal electric accessory (movable member 37b) is opened is equal to the result of one hit in the normal figure fluctuation display game.
It is possible to set the number of times of opening the normal electric power (for example, the number of times of opening the electric power) to the number of times of the second opening (for example, 4 times) larger than the number of times of the first opening (for example, 2 times). In addition, in the electric support state, it is possible to set the probability of hitting the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game (normal figure probability) to be higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state. ..

In the electric support state, the normal map fluctuation time, the normal map stop time, the number of normal power opening times, the normal power opening time,
By changing any one or more of the normal figure probabilities, the time for changing the state of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) to the open state is extended more than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of electric support states that change different things. Further, it may be set so that the normal electric accessory (movable member 37b) is not opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the electric support state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

In this modified example, it is assumed that the electric support state always occurs after the end of the special game state.
Further, in this modified example, regardless of whether or not "V has passed" in the special game state, the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode) is always performed after the end of the special game state.
It shifts to the normal game state ST1 (normal mode) at the end of the electric support state. That is, there is no second specific game state ST3 (High mode), and the transition of the game state as shown in FIG. 8 is performed only between the normal game state ST1 and the first specific game state ST2.

FIG. 120 (a) shows the jackpot types and distribution probabilities that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 in this modified example. In this modified example, the small hit types that can be selected in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, the special variable winning device that is opened for each small hit type, the opening time, the number of opening times, and the distribution probability are the first implementation. It is the same as the form (see FIG. 5D).
In this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 120A, there are four types of special results in the special figure 2 variable display game: 15R probability variation A, 15R probability variation B, 8R probability variation A, and 4R normal A. There are, and the types of special results in the special figure 1 variable display game are 15R probability variation C, 8R probability variation B, 4R.
There are four types, probability variation A and 4R normal B. The types of these special results are selected based on the jackpot symbol random numbers.

The type of special result is probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation A, B, C, 8R probability variation A, B, 4R probability variation A)
In the case of, the first special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38 is opened in the first round, the upper V is opened, and the second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 is opened in the second and subsequent rounds. The lower long opening is performed.
On the other hand, if the type of special result is a normal jackpot (4R normal A, B), the first round is the first.
The upper short opening is performed to open the special variable winning device (upper large winning opening) 38, and the lower long opening is performed to open the second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 from the second round onward.

Further, in FIG. 120 (a), the number of time reductions (maximum number of continuations of the electric support state) that can be selected in the special figures 1 and 2 and the normal electric opening pattern in the electric support state (ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b)) are shown. ) Opening pattern) is also shown. In addition, in FIG. 120 (a), the probability variation jackpot (15R probability variation A,
B, C, 8R probability variation A, B, 4R probability variation A) corresponds to the case where the type of special result is the probability variation jackpot and there is "V passage", and the normal jackpot (4R normal A, B) is This corresponds to the case where the type of special result is usually a big hit and "no V passage".

In this modified example, the electric support state always starts when the special game state ends. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), when the type of the special result is a probability variation jackpot and “with V passage”, the number of time reductions is up to the next time. That is, the electric support state continues from the end of the special game state to the start of the next special game state.
On the other hand, when the type of special result is usually a big hit and "No V passage", the number of time reductions is 100 times. That is, the electric support state continues from the end of the special game state to the start of the next special game state, but the special figure variation display game from the end of the special game state to the start of the next special game state. If the number of times of execution of the game exceeds 100 times, the electric support state ends when the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game after the end of the special game state reaches 100 times.

Even if the type of special result is a probabilistic jackpot, if "No V pass", the number of time reductions is 100 times, as in the case of a normal jackpot and "No V pass". Then, the normal electric opening pattern becomes "opening pattern 3".
Also, even if the type of special result is a normal jackpot, if "V pass", the special result type is a probability variation jackpot and the number of time reductions will be until the next time, as in the case of "V pass". , The normal electric opening pattern is "opening pattern 1 (or opening pattern 2)".

Further, in this modified example, regardless of whether or not "V has passed" in the special game state, the first specific game state ST2 (small hit RUSH mode) is always performed after the end of the special game state.
It shifts to the normal game state ST1 (normal mode) at the end of the electric support state.
That is, when the type of special result is a normal jackpot or a probability variation jackpot, "No V passage"
In the case of, the state shifts to the first specific game state ST2 after the end of the special game state, and when the number of executions of the special figure variation display game after the end of the special game state reaches 100 times, the electric support state ends. At the same time, the game shifts to the normal game state ST1.
In addition, when the type of the special result is a normal jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot and there is "V passage", the process shifts to the first specific gaming state ST2 after the end of the special gaming state, and the special gaming state ends. From 1 to the start of the next special gaming state, the electric support state continues and the first specific gaming state ST2 continues.

For example, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the electric support state (that is, the small hit RUSH mode), one opening time of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) is 80 in the opening pattern 1.
It is 0 ms, 1000 ms in the open pattern 2, and 1500 m in the open pattern 3.
s. Therefore, the opening pattern 3 selected when the type of special result is a normal jackpot (or a probability variation jackpot) and "No V passage" is selected when the type of special result is a probability variation jackpot (or a normal jackpot). Therefore, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) is longer than that of the opening patterns 1 and 2 selected in the case of "V passage".
Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), when the period from the start of one open state to the start of the next open state is one cycle, in the electric support state (that is, the small hit RUSH mode), it is common. Regardless of the type of electric release pattern, the time required for one cycle is 1800 ms.

Here, in this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 115, the second starting winning opening 37 and the second special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 are arranged in the right gaming area, and the second The special variable winning device (lower large winning opening) 39 is on the downstream side of the second starting winning opening 37. That is, when the game ball is launched (right-handed) toward the lower prize opening, the game ball can flow into the second start winning opening 37 before arriving at the lower prize opening, and the second start If it does not flow into the winning opening 37 or the lower winning opening, it is collected by the out opening 30a.

Therefore, the longer the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b), the second the game ball becomes.
It is easy to win the starting prize opening 37, and it is difficult to win the lower grand prize opening.
In the opening pattern 3, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) is the longest, and it is most likely that the game ball wins the second starting winning opening 37 before reaching the lower large winning opening, so a small hit. It is the least likely to benefit from RUSH (“frequent small hits”).
On the other hand, in the opening pattern 1, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) is the shortest, and the possibility that the game ball will win the second starting winning opening 37 before reaching the lower winning opening is the lowest. Most likely to benefit from small hits RUSH (“frequent small hits”).

Further, in this modification, for example, as shown in FIG. 5D, in the small hit RUSH mode (that is, the electric support state), when the result of the special figure 2 variation display game (main variation) is the small hit result. The opening time of the lower large winning opening in the special gaming state (small hit gaming state) based on the small hit result is 1600 ms. That is, one opening time (1600 ms) of the lower prize opening in the electric support state is one opening time (800 ms, 1000 ms and 1500 ms) of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) in the electric support state (FIG. 120 (FIG. 120). Since it is longer than any of b))), the lower large winning opening is open even after the second starting winning opening 37 is closed.
Therefore, the second start winning prize is compared with the case where one opening time of the lower prize opening in the electric support state is the same as or shorter than the one opening time of the ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) in the electric support state. Since there is a high possibility that a game ball that has not won a prize in the mouth 37 will win a prize in the lower prize opening, the interest of the electric support state will be improved.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present modification, the variable display game (special figure variable display game) is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the starting winning opening provided in the game area 32, and the variable display game is executed. When a special result is derived in the above, it is easy to win a game ball into the large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) provided in the game area 32. In the gaming machine 10 that generates a gaming state, the first starting winning opening 36 and the starting winning opening 36 are used as starting winning openings.
The special game state includes the second start winning opening 37, and the special game state includes the first special game state (big hit game state) executed when the first special result (big hit result) is derived in the variable display game.
It is executed when the second special result (small hit result) is derived in the variable display game, and the first
The second special game state (small hit game state) in which the game value that can be given to the player is lower than that of the special game state is included, and the variable display game is based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening 36. 1 Variable display game (Special Figure 1 variable display game) is executed, and the second variable display game (Special Figure 2 variable display game) is executed as a variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37. Variable display game execution control means (game control device 100), an ordinary electric accessory (movable member 37b) that converts a game ball into an open state in which a game ball easily wins a prize and a closed state in which a game ball does not win a prize to the second start winning opening 37. An electric support state can be generated by controlling the opening mode of the normal electric accessory to a specific opening mode (one of the opening patterns 1 to 3) in which the game ball is more likely to win the second starting winning opening 37 than in the normal state. It is equipped with an electric support control means (game control device 100) and can generate a second special game state in the electric support state, and the second start winning opening 37 is a large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). The electric support control means is arranged on the upstream side of the flow path of the game ball launched toward, and the electric support control means has a plurality of types of specific opening modes (opening patterns) in which the opening times of ordinary electric accessories are different. One of the specific opening modes is selected from 1 to 3) according to the type of the first special result, and the opening mode of the ordinary electric accessory is controlled to the selected specific opening mode (FIG. 3). See 120 (a)).

Therefore, by providing a plurality of types of specific opening modes (for example, opening patterns 1 to 3),
Since it is possible to make different balls obtained during the electric support state, it is possible to enhance the interest of the electric support state.
Further, by selecting the specific opening mode according to the type of the first special result (big hit result) from the plurality of types of the specific opening mode, the acquired balls can be distributed according to the first special result. It is possible to enhance the interest of special results.
It should be noted that this modification can also be applied to a game machine provided with a display device 41 having a display screen such as a liquid crystal display.
Further, this modification can also be applied to a game machine that does not perform simultaneous fluctuations.
Further, this modification can be applied to a gaming machine that does not have a configuration (probability variation operating area 38h or the like) for determining whether or not a high probability state is generated after the end of the special gaming state.
Further, in this modification, as a normal electric opening pattern (specific opening mode) in the electric support state,
Although three types of open patterns 1 to 3 are prepared, the types of the normal electric open pattern in the electric support state are not limited to the three types.

Further, in the game machine of the present modification, as the game mode (game mode managed by the effect control device 300, that is, the effect mode), the first game mode (normally) defined as the variable display game in which the first variable display game is the main. A mode) and a second game mode (small hit RUSH mode) defined as a variable display game in which the second variable display game is the main are provided.
In the electric support state, it is possible to configure the second game mode to be set.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the acquired balls different in the second game mode (small hit RUSH mode), so that it is possible to enhance the interest of the second game mode.

Further, the game machine of this modified example is provided below the game area 32 and includes an out port 30a capable of collecting the game ball, and as a large winning opening, the first large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38). The second major winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is provided, and the second starting winning opening 37 is the second of the flow paths of the game ball launched toward the second major winning opening. Arranged on the upstream side of the big prize opening,
The out opening 30a is arranged on the downstream side of the flow path of the game ball launched toward the second big winning opening, and the first big winning opening is the second big winning opening. It is possible that the ball is not arranged in the flow path of the game ball launched toward the ball, or is arranged in the flow path upstream of the second starting winning opening 37.
With this configuration, by providing a plurality of types of specific opening modes (for example, opening patterns 1 to 3), the winning balls associated with winning the second major winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) can be obtained. Since it is possible to make them different, it is possible to enhance their interest.
In this modified example, the first large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is a game ball launched toward the right gaming area (second large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39)). The flow path) is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting winning opening 37, but the first large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is arranged, for example, in the left gaming area. Is also good. That is, the first special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) does not have to be arranged in the flow path of the game ball launched toward the second special winning opening.

Further, the game machine of this modified example is a normal electric accessory (movable member) in the electric support state regardless of the type of the specific opening mode (general electric opening pattern) selected by the electric support control means (game control device 100). Opening time of 37b) (800ms, 1000ms and 1 in the case of this modification)
500 ms (see FIG. 120 (b))) is the opening time of the second large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) in the electric support state (in the case of this modified example, 1600 ms (see FIG. 5 (d))). It can be configured to be shorter than.
With this configuration, the second major winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) in the electric support state
) Will increase, so the interest of the electric support state will improve.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and is, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the gaming ball of. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. This slot machine is not limited to a slot machine that uses medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as a slot machine that uses a game ball. In addition, the configurations of the above-described embodiments and modifications can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description but by the scope of claims, and it is intended that all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims are included.

10 Game machine 19a Upper speaker 19b Lower speaker 30a Out port 32 Game area 36 First start winning opening (starting winning opening)
37 Second start winning opening (starting winning opening)
37b Movable member (ordinary electric accessory)
38 1st special variable winning device (large winning opening, 1st large winning opening)
39 Second special variable winning device (large winning opening, second large winning opening)
41a Main display device (LED, production display device)
41cL left side notification lamp (LED)
41cR right side notification lamp (LED)
100 Game control device (variable display game execution control means, electric support control means)
300 effect control device (specific effect execution control means, light emission control means, sound output control means)

Claims (1)

In a game machine that executes a variable display game based on the winning of a game ball to the start winning opening and generates a special game state in which a player can be given a game value when a special result is derived in the variable display game. ,
As the starting winning opening, a first starting winning opening and a second starting winning opening arranged on the right side with respect to the first starting winning opening are provided.
The first variable display game is executed as the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening, and the second variable display game is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening. Variable display game execution control means for executing variable display games,
With speakers
A sound output control means for controlling the speaker and
A notification control means for controlling a notification unit composed of a light emitting member is provided.
The notification unit includes a first notification unit corresponding to both the first fluctuation display game and the second fluctuation display game, a second notification unit corresponding to the first fluctuation display game, and the second notification unit. A third notification unit, which is arranged on the right side of the game and corresponds to the second variation display game, is included.
As game modes, a first game mode in which the first variable display game is mainly executed as a variable display game, a second game mode in which the second variable display game is mainly executed as a variable display game, and Is provided,
The sound output control means has different sound output modes of the speaker depending on whether the first variable display game is executed as the main variable display game or the second variable display game is executed.
The notification control means
The light emitting mode of the first notification unit is different depending on whether the first variable display game is executed or the second variable display game is executed as the main variable display game .
By blinking either the second notification unit or the third notification unit, it is possible to notify which of the first variation display game and the second variation display game is being executed. A game machine to play.

Images